advertisement
Page PB
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page iii
Document Revisions
REVISION DESCRIPTION of CHANGE
F
Update Patents, Add 2.7.2 Errata
E
Deleted from the Table of Contents: Table of Figures, Table of Tables, and Table of Tasks; Added Evolution Databases to Chapters 1 & 7;
Grammatical, pictorial, and technical updates. Revised to update for software v2.3.1, and v2.4.1.
Software v2.3.1 include the following:
• Knob function improvements
• BARO function moved to dedicated Hot Key preventing inadvertent adjustment
• Map Declutter function removed from Hot Key to the MENU Map Settings page
• Support for ADF1 and ADF2 Bearing Pointer sources
• Support for Radio Altitude Display
• MINIMUMS annunciation relocated to Selected Minimums Field
• Battery annunciation relocated to top left corner below Selected Airspeed Field
• Overvoltage protection whenever aircraft’s electrical system generates more than 33 volts, PFD automatically switches to its battery power
• Support for Redline or Barber pole airspeed limits that vary with pressure altitude
• Support for MACH number displayed in Data Bar for Mmo aircraft
• Single dedicated Hot Key for Traffic Overlay and Traffic Altitude Filter when configured with optional EHA
• RSM GPS can be configured to share its position among all Evolution Displays when all the panel-mounted GPS units fail
Software v2.4.1 include the following:
• Hot Key Color Legend improvements
• “ON” setting removed from Flight Plan, Airports, VOR, and Intersections/NDB Basemap features
Page iv
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page v
Page iv
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
REVISION DESCRIPTION of CHANGE
D
C
B
Updated for software v2.2 and v2.2.3 Grammatical, pictorial, and technical updates
Updated for software v2.1
Grammatical, pictorial, and technical updates
A
Added Index.
Using new part number 091-00005-001
Grammatical, pictorial, and technical updates. Revised to update for software v2.0, including the following:
• All images updated with v2.0 images
• Updated Color philosophy
• Annotate features unavailable on EFD1000 Pilot PFD
• Hot Key update. Menu update
• Added Altitude Trend Vector
• Added Minimums Marker
• Updated range settings; 2 and 3 NM, delete 2.5 NM
• Added ability to select Celsius or Fahrenheit units of measure for OAT
• Entire Emergency and Abnormal Procedures Chapter updated
• Added Map Auto Range
• Updated Vspeed configuration
• Added additional GPSS information
• Addition of Hazard Awareness options, WX-500/Lightning, Data Link Weather, and Traffic
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page v
REVISION DESCRIPTION of CHANGE
C*
( )
**Part number change: old part number A-01-184-00 REV C; new part number 091-00005-001 REV ( ).
Grammatical, pictorial, and technical corrections and updates. Revised to update for software version 1.1, which include:
• New start-up splash screen
• Failure message for RSM and Config Module link
• Brightness changes
• Auto brightness range 1% - 70%
• Manual brightness range 1% - 100%
• During internal battery operation, brightness capped at 40% for Auto mode and 70% for Manual mode
• When temperature is above ≥ 70° C, brightness capped at 30% for Auto mode and 70% for Manual mode
• Menu, System Status Page added Unit S/N
• Wind Speed and Direction Degrees do not display when
• When aircraft is on the ground
• When wind speed is ≤10. Additionally, the Wind Arrow does not display
Added Title page, Revision page and Index
B Layout Update
A Initial Release
* Legacy P/N revision is displayed above the new CI number Revision
Page vi
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page PB
Page PB
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Table of Contents
Document Revisions ................................................................................ iv
Copyrights, Trademarks and Patents .................................................... xi
Approvals ................................................................................................... xii
LIMITED WARRANTY Aspen Avionics, Inc. .......................................... xiii
Weather Data Warranty .........................................................................xvi
XM WX Satellite Radio Service Agreement .......................................xvii
Conventions.............................................................................................. xix
Covered Functionality ..................................................................................................xix
Terminology .......................................................................................................................xix
Color Philosophy .............................................................................................................xxi
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes..............................................................................xxii
Example Graphics .........................................................................................................xxiii
Pilot Familiarity ................................................................................................................xxiii
Information Covered in this Pilot’s Guide ......................................................xxiv
Chapter 1
Welcome and Introduction ....................................................... 1-1
1.1.
System Overview ..................................................................................................1-4
1.1.1.
Primary Flight Display Unit (PFD) ............................................. 1-5
1.1.2.
Configuration Module (CM) ........................................................ 1-6
1.1.3.
Analog Converter Unit (ACU)
1
.................................................... 1-6
1.1.4.
Remote Sensor Module (RSM) ................................................... 1-7
1.1.5.
Evolution Weather Receiver (EWR50)
1
................................... 1-7
1.1.6.
Evolution Databases ........................................................................ 1-8
091-00005-001 REV F
Chapter 2
Controls and Display ................................................................. 2-1
2.1.
Controls & Display Orientation .......................................................................2-2
2.2.
Controls ......................................................................................................................2-4
2.2.1.
Left and Right Knobs ...................................................................... 2-4
2.2.1.1.
Left Knob Functions .......................................................... 2-5
2.2.1.2.
Right Knob Functions ...................................................... 2-5
2.2.1.3.
SYNC Function........................................................... 2-6
2.2.1.4.
Using the Knobs (Example) .......................................... 2-8
2.2.2.
Navigation Source Select Buttons
1
......................................... 2-8
2.2.2.1.
CDI Navigation Source Select Button
1
................... 2-9
2.2.2.2.
Bearing Pointer Source Select Buttons
1
..............2-10
2.2.3.
Hot Keys ................................................................................................2-11
2.2.4.
Menu .......................................................................................................2-14
2.2.4.1.
Using the Menus ...............................................................2-14
2.2.4.2
.
Display Lighting ................................................................2-18
2.2.5.
Range Buttons ...................................................................................2-19
2.2.6.
REV Button ...........................................................................................2-19
2.3.
Display .....................................................................................................................2-20
2.3.1.
Cleaning the Display Screen .....................................................2-21
2.3.2.
Attitude Display ................................................................................2-22
2.3.2.1.
Attitude Director Indicator (ADI) .............................2-24
2.3.2.2.
Airspeed Tape and Bug .................................................2-25
2.3.2.2.a.
Mach Number Display for Mmo Aircraft ............2-26
2.3.2.3.
Altitude Tape, Altitude Alerter, and Vertical Speed............................................................2-27
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page vii
2.3.2.4.
Instrument Approach Indicators 1 ...........................2-28
2.3.3.
Data Bar .................................................................................................2-29
2.3.4. Navigation Display ..........................................................................2-30
2.3.4.1. Numerical Direction Indicator
(Magnetic Compass) .......................................................2-32
Compass Modes: 360º vs. ARC
.............................................2-32
Navigation Information
..........................................................2-33
2.3.4.2. Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
1
......................2-34
2.3.4.3. Course Pointer and Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
1
................2-34
2.3.4.4. Deviation Off-Scale Indication
1
...........................................2-35
2.3.4.5. Auto Course Select
1
.........................................................2-35
2.3.4.6. Bearing Pointers
1
...............................................................2-36
2.3.4.7.
Rate of Turn Indicator ....................................................2-37
2.3.4.8.
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) ...................................2-37
2.3.4.9.
Situational Awareness Map .......................................2-38
Chapter 3
Flying the Pro PFD ...................................................................... 3-1
3.1.
Quick Controls Overview .................................................................................3-3
3.2. Example Flight Scenario ...................................................................................3-5
3.2.1.
Pre-Departure (Startup) ................................................................. 3-6
3.2.2. Departure .............................................................................................3-17
3.2.3.
Enroute ..................................................................................................3-19
3.2.4. Arrival and Approach to Landing ...........................................3-22
3.3. Conclusion ...............................................................................................3-27
Chapter 4
Reference Guide ......................................................................... 4-1
4.1. Air Data, Attitude and Heading Reference System (ADAHRS) ..4-2
4.1.1.
Attitude.................................................................................................... 4-3
4.1.2. Pitot Obstruction Monitor ............................................................ 4-4
4.1.3. Heading ................................................................................................... 4-5
4.1.4.
Free Gyro Mode .................................................................................. 4-6
4.1.5. Degraded ADAHRS Performance ............................................. 4-7
4.2. Attitude Display .....................................................................................................4-8
4.2.1. Attitude Indicator .............................................................................. 4-8
4.2.1.1.
Roll Scale .................................................................................. 4-9
4.2.1.2.
Pitch Scale ............................................................................... 4-9
4.2.1.3.
Slip/Skid Indicator .............................................................. 4-9
4.2.1.4.
Flight Director
1
..................................................................... 4-9
4.2.2. Airspeed Indicator ...........................................................................4-10
4.2.2.1. Selected Airspeed ...........................................................4-12
4.2.2.2.
Airspeed Display ...............................................................4-13
4.2.2.3. MACH Number Display for Mmo Aircraft ...........4-14
4.2.3. Altimeter ...............................................................................................4-15
4.2.3.1.
Barometric Units of Measure .....................................4-16
4.2.3.2.
Selected Altitude Field ..................................................4-17
4.2.3.3. Altitude Level-Off and Deviation Alert ................4-18
4.2.3.4. MINIMUMS Annunciation
1
..........................................4-19
4.2.3.5. Radio Altitude Display
1
..................................................4-22
4.2.3.6. Altitude Display .................................................................4-23
4.3. Data Bar ...................................................................................................................4-24
Page viii
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page ix
Page viii
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
4.3.1.
True Airspeed or Mach Number (when enabled) .........4-24
4.3.2. Ground Speed ...................................................................................4-25
4.3.3.
Outside Air Temperature (when enabled) ........................4-25
4.3.4. Wind Speed, Direction, and Arrow (when enabled) ...4-26
4.3.5. Barometric Pressure Setting Display .....................................4-26
4.4. Navigation Display ............................................................................................4-27
4.4.1. Compass ..............................................................................................4-28
4.4.1.1. 360° Compass Mode .......................................................4-28
4.4.1.2. ARC Compass Mode .......................................................4-28
4.4.2. Course Pointer
1
................................................................................4-31
4.4.3. TO/FROM Indicator
1
.......................................................................4-32
4.4.4. Course Deviation Indicator and Scale
1
................................4-33
4.4.4.a. Localizer Back Course (BC) Operation
1
................................4-34
4.4.5. CDI Navigation Source
1
................................................................4-34
4.4.6. Auto Course
1
.......................................................................................4-38
4.4.7. CDI Selected Course
1
.....................................................................4-39
4.4.8. Bearing Pointer Source Selection
1
.........................................4-40
4.4.9. Heading Bug .......................................................................................4-43
4.4.10. Aircraft Heading Display ...........................................................4-44
4.4.11. Rate of Turn Indicator .................................................................4-44
4.4.12. Basemap Overlays ........................................................................4-45
4.4.12.1. Basemap Declutter and Range ..............................4-46
4.4.12.2. Flight Plan
1
.........................................................................4-48
4.4.12.3. Map Data Source and Reversion
1
.........................4-48
4.4.13. Ground Track Marker
1
.................................................................4-49
4.4.14. GPS OBS Operation with a PFD and a Mechanical
Standby Nav Indicator
1
..............................................................................4-49
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
4.4.15.
Course Pointer Operation with Integrated VOR/
Localizer/GPS Navigation Systems 1 ....................................................4-49
4.5. Lateral and Vertical Deviation Indicator
1
.............................................4-50
4.5.1. Lateral Deviation Indicator
1
.......................................................4-50
4.5.2. Vertical Deviation Indicator
1
......................................................4-51
4.6.
Vertical Speed Indicator ................................................................................4-52
4.7. Autopilot Integration
1
......................................................................................4-53
4.7.1. GPS Steering (GPSS)
1
......................................................................4-54
4.7.2. Flight Director
1
..................................................................................4-58
4.7.3. Typical Autopilot Operations
1
..................................................4-58
4.8. Hazard Awareness
1
...........................................................................................4-65
4.8.1. Lightning Overlay
1
..........................................................................4-65
4.8.2. Data Link Weather Overlay
1
.......................................................4-67
4.8.3. Traffic Overlay
1
...................................................................................4-71
4.8.3.1. Traffic Symbols
1
..................................................................4-72
4.8.3.2. Traffic Altitude Filter
1
......................................................4-74
4.8.3.3. Traffic Unavailable
1
..........................................................4-75
Chapter 5
Customizing the PFD ................................................................. 5-1
5.1.
Menu Overview .....................................................................................................5-1
5.2. Customizing Basemap Symbol Declutter Settings ......................5-12
5.3. Configuring Vspeeds .......................................................................................5-15
5.4.
LCD Brightness Control ..................................................................................5-20
Page ix
Chapter 6
Expanded Emergency and Abnormal Procedures ............... 6-1
6.1.
Pitot/Static System Blockage ........................................................................6-2
6.1.1.
Identifying and Handling Suspected Pitot and/or Static System Failures ...................................................... 6-4
6.2.
Frequent or Persistent CROSS CHECK ATTITUDE
6.3.
Difference Detected Between the PFD and Mechanical Attitude Indicators ..........................................................6-7
6.4.
Abnormal Shutdown Procedure .................................................................6-8
6.5.
Loss of Aircraft Electrical Power ..................................................................6-9
6.5.1. Overvoltage Protection ....................................................................6-11
6.6.
GPS Failures and RSM Emergency GPS Use
1
.....................................6-11
6.7.
Power Override ...................................................................................................6-13
6.8.
In-Flight AHRS Reset ........................................................................................6-14
6.9.
GPSS Operation, Annunciations, and Autopilot Modes
1
..........6-16
6.10. Warning, Caution, and Advisory Summary ....................................6-18
Chapter 7
Appendices .................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.
Operating Limitations ........................................................................................7-1
7.2. Software Versions and Serial Number .....................................................7-1
7.3. Evolution Database ............................................................................................7-3
7.3.1.1. Jeppesen Subscription ................................................... 7-4
Page x
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
7.3.1.2. Monthly Jeppesen Updates ......................................... 7-5
7.3.2.
Seattle Avionics Software Database ....................................... 7-6
7.3.2.1. Seattle Avionics Subscription ..................................... 7-6
7.3.2.2. Seattle Avionics Software Updates .......................... 7-7
7.4. MicroSD Card ..........................................................................................................7-7
7.4.1. Loading the microSD Card into the EFD Unit ................... 7-8
7.4.2.
Card Installation Procedure and Operational Check..... 7-8
7.4.3.
Removal Procedure .......................................................................... 7-9
7.5.
Specifications .......................................................................................................7-10
7.5.1.
Primary Flight Display Unit (PFD) ...........................................7-10
7.5.2.
Remote Sensor Module (RSM) ................................................7-12
7.5.3.
Analog Converter Unit (ACU) ...................................................7-12
7.5.4.
Operational Specifications .........................................................7-13
7.6.
Glossary ...................................................................................................................7-14
7.7.
Index ..........................................................................................................................7-18
091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page PB
Page PB
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Copyrights, Trademarks and Patents
Copyright 2010-2015.
Aspen Avionics® is a registered trademark of Aspen Avionics, Inc.
Evolution™, EFD1000 Pro PFD™, EFD1000 VFR PFD™, EFD1000 MFD™,
EFD500 MFD™, EFD1000™, EFD500™, ARX- 100™, ATX – 200™, ATX-
200G™, ATX 100™, ATX-100G™ and the Aspen Avionics logo are trademarks of Aspen Avionics, Inc. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Aspen Avionics, Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the property of their respective companies. No part of the Pilot’s Guide may be reproduced, copied, stored, transmitted, or disseminated, for any reason, without the express written permission of Aspen Avionics, Inc. Aspen Avionics hereby grants permission to download a single copy, and any revision, of the Pilot’s
Guide onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium for personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of the Pilot’s Guide or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of the
Pilot’s Guide or revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
The Aspen Avionics EFD1000 Pro PFD, EFD1000 VFR PFD™ and EFD1000
Pro H PFD™, when configured with theEvolution Hazard Awareness options provides access to information from multiple sources. Aspen
Avionics does not control, edit, or review the content of said information and, as such, is not responsible for information or the actions or conduct of any company that provides weather data used by the Aspen Avionics
EFD1000 Pro PFD, EFD1000 VFR PFD™, and EFD1000 Pro H PFD™.
Therefore, although Aspen Avionics strives to provide the highest quality service, ALL SERVICES AND WEATHER DATA ARE PROVIDED
AS-IS and neither Aspen Avionics nor its suppliers, subcontractors, information sources or developers (collectively called “Suppliers”) are responsible for 1) the accuracy, completeness, timeliness, reliability, content, or availability of the Services or any information accessed;
2) loss or damage to your records or data; or 3) your use of, or results achieved from, the Services or any information accessed.
Avidyne® is a registered trademark of Avidyne Corporation; Bendix/
King® is a registered trademark of Honeywell; Garmin GTX™is a trademark of Garmin International, Inc.; NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; SkyWatch® is a registered trademark of L-3
Communications; Stormscope® WX-500 is a registered trademark of
BFGoodrich Avionics Systems, Inc.; and XM is a registered trademark of
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
The EFD1000, EFD1000C3, EFD1000H, EFD500, and EFD500H, and derivatives thereof, are protected under U.S. Patent Numbers
8,085,168; 7,789,349; 8,224,566, 8,996,309; 8,643,508; 8,502,702;
8,749,594, European Patent Number EP 2167917 and additional patents pending.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page xi
Approvals
The FAA and the EASA (European Aviation Safety Agency) has approved the EFD1000 PFD under the following TSOs and ETSOs:
FAA TSO (Technical Standard Order)
TSO-C2d, TSO-C3d, TSO-C4c, TSO-C6d, TSO-C8d, TSO-C10b,TSO-C106,
TSO-C113
EASA ETSO (European Technical Standard Order)
ETSO-C2D, ETSO-C3D, ETSO-C4C, ETSO-C6D, ETSO-C8D, ETSO-C10B,
ETSO-C106, ETSO-C113
The following certification levels also apply to this product:
• Environmental Certification Level: RTCA DO-160E
• Software Certification Level: RTCA DO-178B Level C
Aspen Avionics, Inc.
5001 Indian School Road NE
Albuquerque, NM 87110
Phone: (505) 856-5034
Fax: (505) 314-5440 www.aspenavionics.com
This Pilot’s Guide provides information on the use and operation of the
Evolution Flight Display 1000 Primary Flight Display (EFD1000 PFD).
This guide is current as of the latest revision listed on the Document
Revisions page. Specifications and operational details are subject to change without notice when using an earlier or later software version.
Please visit the Aspen Avionics web site for the most up-to-date Pilot’s
Guide.
Installation of the EFD1000 PFD in a type-certificated aircraft must be performed in accordance with the latest revision of the EFD1000 and
EFD500 Installation Manual.
Page xii
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page xiii
Page xii
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
LIMITED WARRANTY
Aspen Avionics, Inc.
1.
YOUR WARRANTY
. Aspen Avionics, Inc. (“Aspen”) warrants to you, the original purchaser, that its Products (if purchased from an authorized dealer) will comply with applicable specifications (as set forth in the owner’s manual) in all material respects and will be free from material defects in workmanship or materials for a period of twentyfour (24) months beginning with the date that the aircraft in which the Product has been installed has been returned to service following installation by an Aspen authorized dealer (“Return to Service Date”).
“Product” means new end equipment or hardware items, replaceable units and components of those units.
2.
YOUR REMEDY
. During the term of this warranty, Aspen will repair or replace, at its discretion, without charge (see Section 13 below for information on covered transportation costs), any Product that does not comply with the warranty of Section 1 above (a “Nonconforming
Product”), so long as the warranty claim is timely submitted and the procedures in Section 14 (below) are followed. Aspen warrants repaired and/or replacement items only for the unexpired portion of the original warranty period, or, if the warranty has expired, for six months from
Aspen’s shipment of the repaired or replacement Product.
3.
CONDITIONS TO COVERAGE
. Aspen’s obligation under this warranty is conditioned on your fulfillment of the obligation to:
A. Maintain records accurately reflecting operating time of and maintenance performed on the Product,
B. Furnish proof sufficient to establish that the item is a
Nonconforming Product, and
C. Allow Aspen access to all relevant records in order to substantiate your warranty claim.
4.
EXCLUSIONS
. The following are not covered by (and are expressly excluded from) this warranty:
A. Normal wear and tear and the need for regular overhaul and maintenance,
B. Exposure of the Product to temperature, environmental, operating, or other conditions other than those prescribed in the owner’s manual,
C. Failure to install or operate the Product as prescribed in the owner’s manual or as Aspen otherwise directs,
D. Alterations or repairs made by anyone other than Aspen or its authorized service center,
E. Maintenance, repair, installation, handling, transportation, storage, operation (including, without limitation, operation of the product’s software or host medium), or use which is improper or otherwise does not comply with Aspen’s instructions as set forth in the owner’s manual,
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page xiii
F. Accident, contamination, damage from a foreign object or weather conditions, abuse, misuse, neglect, or negligence,
G. Exposure of the product or the product’s host medium to any computer virus or other intentionally disruptive, destructive, or disabling computer code, and
8.
EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY
. THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE
AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES. THE IMPLIED WARRANTY
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AS WELL AS ALL OTHER IMPLIED WARRANTIES
(STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE) EXPIRE AT THE END OF THE WARRANTY
PERIOD PRESCRIBED IN SECTION 1.
5.
H. Any damage precipitated by failure of a product Aspen has supplied that is not under warranty or by any product supplied by someone else.
Page xiv
INVALIDATION OF WARRANTY
Aspen or its authorized service center.
AND RETURNED IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
. This warranty is void if the product is altered or repair is attempted or made by anyone other than
6.
WARRANTY CARD
. The Return to Service Date must be included in an accurately completed Aspen warranty application form submitted by the installing authorized dealer within 30 days of the
Return to Service Date. The warranty application must be signed by the authorized repairman who certifies that the equipment has been safely and properly installed in accordance with all Aspen supplied technical information and in accordance with all applicable FAA procedures and requirements. The warranty application form must note the repairman’s
FAA certificate number to be valid. FAILURE TO COMPLETE AND RETURN
THE WARRANTY CARD MAY RESULT IN DENIAL OF WARRANTY CLAIMS.
MAKING CERTAIN THAT THE WARRANTY CARD IS COMPLETED, SIGNED,
7.
SOLE REMEDY
. Aspen’s sole obligation, and your exclusive remedy under this warranty, is limited to either the repair or replacement, at Aspen’s option, of any Nonconforming Product as provided herein.
Some States do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, so the above limitation may not apply to you.
9.
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
. ASPEN SHALL NOT UNDER ANY
CIRCUMSTANCES BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL LOSS OR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND
(INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION: DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS,
LOSS OF REVENUES, OR LOSS OF USE OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION),
EVEN IF ASPEN HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OR CERTAINTY
OF THOSE DAMAGES OR IF ASPEN COULD HAVE REASONABLY
FORESEEN THOSE DAMAGES.
Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the preceding limitations may not apply to you.
10.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
. ASPEN’S AGGREGATE LIABILITY
HEREUNDER, WHETHER BASED UPON CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE AND STRICT LIABILITY), INDEMNITY, OR OTHERWISE, WILL
NOT EXCEED THE PRICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE WARRANTED PRODUCT.
THE EXCLUSIONS OF TYPES OF DAMAGES CONTAINED HEREIN WILL BE
DEEMED INDEPENDENT OF, AND WILL SURVIVE, ANY FAILURE OF THE
ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY LIMITED REMEDY UNDER THE TERMS OF
ANY AGREEMENT.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page xv
Page xiv
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
11.
EXTENSION OF WARRANTY
. No extension of this warranty will be binding upon Aspen unless set forth in writing and signed by
Aspen’s authorized representative.
12.
DEALER WARRANTIES
. Any express or implied warranty or remedy in addition to or different from those stated herein that is offered by a dealer (“Dealer Warranty”) will be the sole responsibility of the dealer, who will be solely responsible for all liability, loss, cost, damage, or expense arising out of or in connection with any such Dealer
Warranty. Although Aspen provides training and assistance to dealers, it cannot control the installation of its Products by its dealers, which are independent businesses not owned or controlled by Aspen.
13.
TRANSPORTATION COSTS
. Aspen will assume round trip transportation costs for a Product determined by Aspen to be a
Nonconforming Product in an amount not to exceed normal (non express) shipping charges within the continental United States. You are responsible for all import/export fees, taxes, duties, customs, documentation fees, clearance fees, and similar fees and charges.
You may contact Aspen to obtain a freight courier account number for prepaid shipping of the return. If Aspen subsequently determines that the Product is not a Nonconforming Product, that this warranty is inapplicable, that the Product is out of warranty, that the defect or malfunction is excluded from coverage, or that the warranty is invalid,
Aspen will invoice you for repair or replacement costs and the shipping costs. Risk of loss or damage for any Product in transit will be borne by the party initiating the transportation.
14.
WARRANTY PROCEDURE
. If you require warranty service, you may contact your local Aspen Authorized Dealer or you may contact Aspen directly as described below. An original or copy of the sales receipt from the original Aspen Authorized dealer will be required to obtain any warranty service. You may contact Aspen for warranty service directly by calling Aspen Customer Service at (505)
856-5034; by writing to Aspen Customer Service Department, Aspen
Avionics, Inc., 5001 Indian School Road NE, Albuquerque, New Mexico,
87110; or by visiting the Aspen Website at http://www.aspenavionics.
com.
This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights, which vary from State to State.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page xv
Weather Data Warranty
THE WEATHER DATA SOFTWARE PRODUCT IS PROVIDED “AS IS.” ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR OF NON-
INFRINGEMENT ARE HEREBY EXCLUDED.
PILOT SAFETY.
If you use XM Services, it is your responsibility to exercise prudent discretion and observe all safety measures required by law and your own common sense. You assume the entire risk related to your use of the
Services. XM and Aspen assume no responsibility for accidents resulting from or associated with use of the Services. Your Radio Service includes weather information, and you acknowledge that such information is not for “safety for life,” but is merely supplemental and advisory in nature, and therefore cannot be relied upon as safety-critical in connection with any aircraft. This information is provided “as is” and XM and Aspen disclaim any and all warranties, express and implied, with respect thereto or the transmission or reception thereof. XM and Aspen further do not warrant the accuracy, disclosed on the Radio Service. In no event will XM and
Aspen, their data suppliers, service providers, marketing/distribution, software or Internet partners or hardware manufacturers be liable to you or to any third party for any direct, indirect, incidental, consequential, special, exemplary or punitive damages or lost profits resulting from use of or interruptions in the transmission or reception of the Services.
LIMITS ON OUR RESPONSIBILITY
A.
DISCLAIMERS.
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED HEREIN,
WE MAKE NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE RADIO SERVICE.
YOUR USE OF THE SERVICE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK. THE
CONTENT AND FUNCTIONALITY OF THE SERVICE IS
PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. ALL SUCH WARRANTIES OR
REPRESENTATIONS (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT)
ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED.
B.
LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY.
WE ARE NOT RESPONSIBLE
FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES OR LOSSES RELATING TO THE USE OF THE RADIO
SERVICE, WHETHER BASED ON NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE.
OUR TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU AND ANY OTHER PERSONS
RECEIVING OUR SERVICES, REGARDLESS OF THE CAUSE, WILL
IN NO EVENT EXCEED THE AMOUNTS THAT YOU HAVE PAID
TO US FOR THE SERVICE THAT YOU RECEIVED DURING THE
SIX (6) MONTH PERIOD IMMEDIATELY PRIOR TO THE SPECIFIC
EVENT THAT GAVE RISE TO THE APPLICABLE DAMAGE OR
LOSS. THIS ALLOCATION OF RISK IS REFLECTED IN OUR
PRICES. YOU MAY HAVE GREATER RIGHTS THAN DESCRIBED
ABOVE UNDER YOUR STATE’S LAWS.
Page xvi
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page xvii
Page xvi
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
XM WX Satellite Radio
Service Agreement
Hardware and required monthly subscription sold separately.
Subscription fee is consumer only. Other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. All programming fees and weather data are subject to change. XM WX weather data displays and individual product availability vary by hardware equipment. Reception of the
XM signal may vary depending on location. Subscriptions subject to
Customer Agreement included with the XM Welcome Kit and available at xmradio.com and are available only in the 48 contiguous United
States. XM WX is a trademark of XM WX Satellite Radio Inc.
Contact XM WX Satellite Radio by phone at (800) 985-9200 to subscribe to XM WX Weather.
091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page xvii
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page xviii
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page PB
Page PB
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Conventions
The following conventions, functionality, terminology, color philosophy, and definitions are used in this manual and on the EFD1000 PFD.
Covered Functionality
This guide covers all the functions available in the EFD1000 PFD and the optional
Evolution Hazard Awareness that is only available with the Pro PFD model.
Some of the functions not available with the Pilot model are noted in the text as “Not available with the Pilot PFD ”.
For the optional Evolution Synthetic Vision (ESV) functions, refer to the Aspen Avionics document 091-00031-001 Evolution Synthetic Vision Pilot’s Guide Supplement.
For complete instructions on the EFD1000 MFD and the EFD500 MFD, refer to the
Aspen Avionics document number 091-00006-001 EFD1000/500 MFD Pilot’s Guide
Terminology
The term
“PFD”
, is used throughout this Pilot’s Guide and refers to the EFD1000 PFD.
Figure 1
shows a typical EFD1000 PFD display. This guide uses the terminology listed in
Table 1
when referring to specific parts of the PFD and
Chapter 4
provides an in-depth discussion and step-by-step instructions for all the available functionality.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page xix
Page xx
Figure 1
EFD1000 PFD Display, Knobs , Buttons, and Keys
Term Example
REV Button, Range Buttons, MENU Button Buttons
Hot Keys / Menu Keys Five keys on the lower right of the display
Buttons
Knobs
Left Button, CDI Navigation Source Select Button (Middle
Button), Right Button
Left (CRS) Knob, Right (HDG) Knob
Navigation Display
Data Bar
Attitude Display
Table 1
EFD1000 PFD Display, Knobs , Buttons, and Keys
NOTE
As the number of colors used on the display is limited, to ensure adequate color differentiation under all lighting conditions, there are a few cases where a given color is used in a slightly different context than described in Table 2.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page xxi
Page xx
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Color Philosophy
Table 2
provides the operational philosophy of color usage on the PFD display.
COLOR PURPOSE COLOR
RED
Used to indicate flight envelope and system limits, and for warning annunciations that require immediate pilot recognition and which may require immediate pilot correction or compensatory action. Red is used to indicate
Data Link Weather precipitation areas.
GREEN
PURPOSE
Used for navigation information or mode data related to or provided by the navigation source currently selected for display on the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) (i.e., navigation deviations, equipment operating state, waypoint information).
Green is also used to indicate Data Link Weather precipitation areas and the status of user controls (i.e., ON, enabled, or active).
AMBER
CYAN
Used to indicate abnormal information sources, and for caution information that requires immediate pilot awareness and for which subsequent pilot action may be required.
Amber is used to indicate Data Link Weather precipitation areas.
MAGENTA
Used for pilot-selectable references (bugs) enabled for editing, for depicting the active GPS navigation leg on a moving map display, and for depicting the flight director bar.
Used to indicate editable values that are not currently selected for editing. CYAN is also used to display bearing pointers, proximity and other traffic icons, and GPS track marker.
WHITE
GRAY
Used to show primary flight data (e.g., IAS, ALT, HDG), scales, and Menu items that are selectable for editing.
Used to show supplemental flight data, and for Hot Key and
Menu legends that are OFF, disabled, or inactive.
BLUE
Used to indicate the sky and Data Link Weather precipitation areas.
BROWN
Used to indicate the ground.
Table 2
Color Guide
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page xxi
Page xxii
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
Where applicable warnings, cautions, and notes are given. Aspen Avionics uses the following icons and definitions (
Table 3
).
Icon
Warning
Caution
Note
Table 3
Warning, Caution, and Note
Definition
Emphasizes a crucial operating or maintenance procedure, which, if not strictly observed, could result in injury to, or death of, personnel or long term health hazards.
Indicates a hazard that may require immediate corrective action.
Indicates an essential operating or maintenance procedure, which, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of, equipment.
Indicates the possible need for future corrective action.
Highlights an important operating or maintenance procedure, condition, or statement.
Safe operation.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page xxiii
Page xxii
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Example Graphics
The example graphics and screen shots used throughout this Pilot’s Guide are provided for reference only and are taken from a simulated flight. They should not be used for actual flights.
Most of the example graphics and screen shots used throughout this Pilot’s Guide
& Reference are based on flying the ILS 16R instrument approach into Reno/Tahoe
International Airport (KRNO) in Reno, Nevada, USA. Those images with the airplane in a right bank show the airplane completing the procedure turn in-bound to intercept the Localizer, descending through 8,660 feet to the target altitude of 8,500 feet. The other main group of images, showing the airplane straight and level, are earlier in the approach, tracking outbound for the procedure turn.
Pilot Familiarity
While the PFD is reasonably intuitive and easy to use, some familiarity with Electronic
Flight Instrument Systems (EFIS) and Horizontal Situation Indicators (HSI) is required.
Aspen Avionics strongly recommends that new users of the PFD get some dual instruction from an experienced instrument CFI, and spend some time becoming familiar with the PFD in day VFR conditions with a safety pilot, before flying in actual instrument meteorological conditions (IMC). To reduce pilot workload, the use of an autopilot (when available) is strongly encouraged.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page xxiii
NOTE
The Pilot PFD supports the display of flight plan and background navigation data from ARINC 429 GPS
Interfaces.
NOTE
The Pilot PFD does not support the display of lateral or vertical deviations from an ARINC 429, or Analog GPS interface .
The Pilot PFD does not support the display of lateral or vertical deviations from an ARINC 429, or Analog VLOC interface.
Information Covered in this Pilot’s Guide
This Pilot’s Guide covers all the features and options available for an EFD1000 PFD.
Because of individual configuration and options purchased, some features may not be available on your particular PFD.
Additionally, the Pilot PFD model does not offer the following features:
• Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
• Dual Bearing Pointers
• Lateral and Vertical Deviation Indicators
• Minimums
• GPS and VLOC Navigation ARINC 429 Interface
• GPS Steering (GPSS)
• Optional Traffic
• Optional Lightning
• Optional Weather
Page xxiv
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page PB
Page PB
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Chapter 1
Welcome and Introduction
Welcome to Aspen Avionics’ Evolution Flight Display (EFD) System, the most flexible, expandable, and upgradable Electronic Flight Instrument
System (EFIS) available for general aviation aircraft. Designed to replace traditional mechanical primary flight instruments—in whole or in part, all at once, or in phases. This modularity and upgradability allows the system to grow with you and your airplane, over time and affordably.
The EFD system is built around the EFD1000 PFD, which replaces a vertical pair of your six primary flight instruments. The PFD has a bright, high-resolution, six-inch diagonal
LCD display, and a number of knobs, buttons, and keys the pilot uses to control the system. The three-inch diameter, four-inch deep can on the back of the display slides into existing panel cutouts (where the top mechanical instrument used to be) (
Figure
1-1
).
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 1-1
EFD1000 Primary Flight Display Unit
Page 1-1
Figure 1-2
Single Display EFD1000 PFD System
Figure 1-3
Dual Display System: PFD & MFD
Page 1-2
The center of the EFD System is the EFD1000 Primary Flight Display (PFD), which replaces the traditional mechanical Attitude Indicator (AI) and Directional Gyro (DG) or Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) (
Figure 1-2
).
The PFD is available in three models - the EFD 1000 Pilot, EFD 1000 VFR and EFD 1000
PRO
Add a second EFD1000 configured as a Multi-Function Display (MFD) (
Figure 1-3
)
,
replacing the Altimeter and Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI), and you’ll double the capabilities of your system, while also providing complete redundancy and backup to your PFD. The EFD1000 MFD contains the same AHRS, ADC, and I/O capabilities as the
PFD for full redundancy and can assume the role of the PFD should it ever fail.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 1-3
Page 1-2
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Adding another MFD, replacing the Airspeed Indicator (ASI) and Turn Coordinator, to round out a complete six-pack replacement and gain even more capability and flexibility (
Figure 1-4
). When you are ready to upgrade, simply contact an Aspen
Avionics Authorized Dealer for more information.
This Pilot’s Guide covers the EFD1000 Pilot model* and the EFD1000 Pro PFD model.
These systems are powerfully flexible, and can be configured in a variety of ways, depending on the other aircraft systems with which they are integrated.
*The Pilot PFD model does not offer the following features:
• Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
• Dual Bearing Pointers
• Lateral and Vertical Deviation Indicators
• Minimums
• GPS and VLOC Navigation ARINC 429 Interface
• GPSS
• Optional Traffic
• Optional Lightning
• Optional Weather
Figure 1-4
Trio Display System: PFD & Dual MFDs
NOTE
Please spend some time with your avionics installer to understand exactly how your PFD is installed and configured in your particular aircraft, to understand the features and capabilities available to you, and to understand how various aircraft system failures and abnormalities may affect your PFD.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
NOTE
With multiple EFD installations, an independent, standby attitude indicator must be within the pilot’s primary maximum field of view.
Page 1-3
Pitot
Existing Aircraft
Pitot Line
Static
Existing Aircraft
Static Line
Aircraft Power
EFD1000 Pro PFD
(Primary Flight Display)
Configuration Module (CM)
12C
Optional Tone Generator
Discrete
Digital GPS/VLOC
Digital VLOC/GPS
Sources ARINC 429
Analog GPS/VLOC via ACU
Analog NAV Sources
Radar Altimeter
Autopilot
Legacy GPS
Analog
Converter Unit
(ACU)
RS-232
Figure 1-5
Pro PFD System Architecture
Page 1-4
SPI
RS-232
Remote
Sensor
Module
(RSM)
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
1.1. System Overview
The PFD system typically consists of four components:
1. EFD1000 Display Unit (PFD)
2. Configuration Module (CM)
3. Remote Sensor Module (RSM)
4. Analog Converter Unit (ACU)
1
The ACU converts older analog signals and interfaces to the industry-standard digital ARINC 429 interface, which is the native language of the PFD. In some installations, generally when the aircraft is not equipped with an autopilot and has only digital GPS/Nav/Comm, the ACU may be omitted.
The system architecture in
Figure 1-5
shows the relationships of the PFD, RSM, CM and ACU.
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 1-5
Page 1-4
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
1.1.1. Primary Flight Display Unit (PFD)
The Primary Flight Display Unit (PFD) is a digital system that consists of a high resolution, six-inch diagonal color LCD display, user controls, photocell, and microSD data card slot. The three-inch diameter, four-inch deep can on the back of the display contains a non-removable electronics module that includes:
• A Sensor Board with solid-state Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) and digital Air Data Computer (ADC)
• A Main Application Processor (MAP) board with Central Processing Unit (CPU), graphics processor and system memory
• An Input-Output Processor (IOP) board for integrating communications with other aircraft systems
Also on the rear of the unit (
Figure 1-6
) are:
• An access cover for removing and replacing the built-in backup battery
• Pneumatic connections to the aircraft’s pitot and static systems
• 44-pin D-sub connector for electrical connections to the PFD
• A cooling fan, to cool the electronics and LCD backlights
The PFD mounts to the front surface of the instrument panel using the standard installation kit; an optional flush-mount installation kit is also available.
Pitot & Static System Connections
Cooling Fan
44-pin D-Sub for Electrical Connections
Access Cover to Internal Battery
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 1-6
EFD1000 Display Unit
Rear Connections
Page 1-5
Figure 1-7
Configuration Module (CM)
Figure 1-8
Analog Converter Unit (ACU)
Page 1-6
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
1.1.2. Configuration Module (CM)
The Configuration Module (
Figure 1-7
), contains an EEPROM device that retains system configuration and calibration data and provides two primary functions:
• Retains aircraft-specific configuration information, calibration data, and user settings, allowing the PFD to be swapped for service purposes without re-entering or re-calibrating the installation
• Contains a license key that configures the PFD software features
The CM is typically attached to the wire bundle coming out of the D-sub connector on the display unit.
1.1.3. Analog Converter Unit (ACU)
1
The Analog Converter Unit (ACU) (
Figure 1-8
), included with most Pro PFD systems, enables the all-digital, EFD1000 System to interface with analog avionics when required.
The ACU converts multiple analog interfaces to the digital ARINC 429 buses supported by the PFD. Control parameters, such as desired heading, are also sent from the Pro PFD to the ACU for conversion to analog format for autopilot support. The ACU is required when any of the following capabilities are required in a Pro PFD installation:
• Interface to supported autopilots
• Interface to conventional VHF navigation radios
• Interface to legacy (non-ARINC 429) GPS navigators
• Interface to supported radar altimeter decision height annunciations
If ARINC 429-based digital radios, such as the Garmin 400/500-series GPS/nav/comm radios are installed in the aircraft and no other aircraft interfaces are desired, the ACU is not required.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 1-7
Page 1-6
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
1.1.4. Remote Sensor Module (RSM)
The Remote Sensor Module (RSM) (
Figure 1-9
), is an integral part of the EFD1000 system and works together with the display unit sensors as part of the AHRS and ADC.
The RSM looks and mounts like a GPS antenna and is mounted on the exterior of the fuselage, typically aft of the cabin.
The RSM contains the following sub-systems:
• 3D magnetic flux (heading) sensors
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT) sensor
• Emergency backup GPS engine and antenna
The RSM communicates with the PFD via a digital cable connection.
Figure 1-9
Remote Sensor Module (RSM)
1.1.5. Evolution Weather Receiver (EWR50)
1
The optional Evolution Weather Receiver, EWR50
(Figure 1-10)
converts the XM
WX Satellite Weather data into a digital format displayed on the EFD1000 Pro PFD.
The EWR50 provides the ability to receive XM WX Satellite Weather data with a paid subscription to XM WX Satellite Weather service. The EWR50 consists of a receiver and antenna.
NOTE
A single EWR50 Receiver will supply data to all EFD units installed on the aircraft.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 1-10
Evolution Weather Receiver (EWR50) - Optional
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
Page 1-7
NOTE
The PFD only requires a preloaded microSD card to support the Evolution Synthetic Vision (ESV) option when installed. Otherwise, the PFD does not require a microSD card.
NOTE
When configured with the ESV option, refer to the
Evolution Synthetic Vision Pilot’s Guide Supplement,
091-00031-001.
1.1.6. Evolution Databases
The Evolution Flight Display System includes two separate databases loaded on a microSD card; one from Jeppesen and one from Seattle Avionics Software.
• The Jeppesen database consists of NavData®, Obstacle, Cultural, and Terrain data.
• The Seattle Avionics database features Instrument Approach Procedure (IAP) charts, Departure charts, Standard Terminal Arrival Route (STAR) charts, and airport diagrams.
Refer to
Chapter 7 Appendices,
for additional information and instructions about updating the databases onto the microSD card.
NOTE
For aircraft with an EFD1000 PFD only and the Evolution Synthetic Vision (ESV) option installed:
Only the Jeppesen database is required to be loaded on the microSD card.
NOTE
For aircraft configured with multiple EFDs; PFD and MFD(s):
The MFD requires both databases loaded on the microSD card; the Jeppesen database for all mapping functions and the Seattle Avionics database for displaying chart data.
Whenever the Evolution Synthetic Vision (ESV) option is installed, the preloaded microSD card is compatible with either the PFD or the MFD and may be interchanged
Page 1-8
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page PB
Page PB
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Chapter 2
Controls and Display
The PFD is a flat-panel LCD primary flight instrument that presents the pilot with all of the information from the traditional six-pack of mechanical instruments: Airspeed, Attitude, Altitude, Turn Coordinator,
Heading Indicator (or HSI) and Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI). Modern technology and standard EFIS symbology enable the consolidation of all six instruments into a single display, tightening the pilot’s instrument scan and reducing pilot workload.
The PFD is a single vertical instrument that replaces the existing Attitude Indicator and Heading Indicator/HSI. The display is divided into three parts: an upper Attitude
Display, a lower Navigation Display, and a Data Bar between the upper and lower halves.
The Attitude and Navigation displays are highly customizable — from stripped-down, minimalist presentations, to dense, information-rich displays — depending on pilot preference and phase of flight.
This chapter gives an overview of all the instruments, information, and controls of the PFD.
Table 2-1
and
Figure 2-2
identify the controls and display orientation (
see
Chapter 4, Reference Guide
for more details).
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 2-1
Pilot PFD
Page 2-1
Figure 2-1a
Pro PFD
Page 2-2
2.1. Controls & Display Orientation
ATTITUDE DISPLAY
CONTROLS
16 Attitude Display
17 Aircraft Reference Symbol
1 Reversion and Power Button
18 Single-Cue Flight Director
2, 4
2
3
Range Buttons
Menu Button
19 Roll Pointer
4 1/2 Hot Key Menu 1 of 2
4
2/2 Hot Key Menu 2 of 2
1, 4, 5
20 Slip/Skid Indicator
5
MIN - Minimums 4
On/Off
LTNG 4 – Data link Lightning
Overlay On/Off
STRK 4 – WX-500 Strikes Overlay
CELL
4
– WX-500 Cells Overlay
21 Altitude Tape
22
Selected Altitude Field (controls the Altitude Bug)
23 Altitude Alerter
6 360/ARC View NXRD
4
– Data Link Weather
Overlay On/Off
24 Numerical Altitude Indication, Altitude Drum/
Pointer
25 Altitude Trend Vector
7
8
GPSS - GPS Steering
4
On/Off
BARO
TRFC
4
– Traffic Overlay On/Off
BARO 4
26 Altitude Bug
27
Decision Height Annunciation 3, 4
9 Right Knob
28 Selected Minimums Field
4
10 Right Button, Double-Line Bearing Pointer Source Select 4
29 Radio Altitude
3, 4
11 CDI Navigation Source Select Button (Middle Button) 4
30 MINIMUMS Marker
4
31 LDI Navigation Source Annunciation
4
12 Left Button, Single-Line Bearing Pointer Source Select 4
32 Airspeed Tape
13 Left Knob
33 Selected Airspeed Field (controls the Airspeed Bug)
14 Automatic Dimming Photocell
15 microSD Card Slot
34 Airspeed Bug
35
Numerical Airspeed Indicator, Airspeed Drum/
Pointer
36 Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
4
37 Lateral Deviation Indicator (LDI) 4
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-3
Page 2-2
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
DATA BAR
38 True Airspeed (TAS) or Mach number
39 Barometric Pressure Setting Field
40 Wind Direction and Speed
41
Wind Direction Arrow
42 Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
43 Ground Speed
NAVIGATION DISPLAY
44 Navigation Display
45 Ownship Symbol
46
Course Pointer 4
47
TO/FROM Indicator 4
48 Rate of Turn Indicator
49 Ground Track Marker
50 Numerical Direction Indicator
51 Selected Course (CRS) Field
4
52 Selected Heading Field
53 Heading Bug
54
Course Deviation Scale 4
55
Course Deviation Indicator 4
56 Vertical Speed Numerical Value
091-00005-001 REV F
57 Vertical Speed Tape
58 Single-Line Bearing Pointer 4
59
Single-Line Bearing Pointer Source 4
60 Single-Line Bearing Pointer Source Info Block
4
61 Double-Line Bearing Pointer
4
62 Double-Line Bearing Pointer Source
4
63 Double-Line Bearing Pointer Source Info Block
4
64 Selected CDI Navigation Source
4
65 Selected CDI Navigation Source Information Block 4
66 Left Knob State
67
Right Knob State
68 Hot Key Label
69 Basemap Range
70 Declutter Level
Table 2-1
PFD Components
1. The Hot Key menu 2/2 is only available when the Pro PFD is configured with the optional Evolution Hazard Awareness option and the associated sensor(s)
2. With compatible autopilots
3. With compatible radar altimeters
4. Not available with the Pilot PFD
5. When configured with the Evolution Synthetic Vision option, refer to the Evolution Synthetic Vision Pilot Guide Supplement
091-00031-001 for additional Hot Key menu
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
14
33
27
23
22
1
32
35
34
38
43
65
18
17
16
36
30
21
25
26
24
30
2 9
31
28
51
61
37
42
48
50
58
41
49
46
52
53
39
40
56
57
68
55
45
54
44
47
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
69
70
66
60
59
64
62
63
67
13
12 11
15
10
9
Figure 2-2
Pro PFD Display Elements
Page 2-3
NOTE
The Pilot PFD Navigation Display has a slaved
Directional Gyro instead of an HSI. It does not have a Course Pointer, Course Deviation Indicator, or
Bearing Pointers.
The Pilot PFD also does not include an approach minimums (MIN) setting. Therefore, these knob functions are not available on the Pilot PFD.
2.2. Controls
The primary means for the pilot to control the PFD are the two knobs and three buttons at the bottom of the display. The knobs control setting CRS and HDG, and additional bugs and altitude settings. The lower three buttons control selection of navigation sources for the CDI and Bearing Pointers. There are three additional buttons above the Hot Keys to control entering and exiting the Menu, setting the Map Range, and
Reversion or Manual Power Control.
Five Hot Keys to the right of the Navigation Display toggle various features on and off.
The function of each is indicated by the label on the display to the left of each key.
2.2.1.
Left and Right Knobs
The Left and Right Knobs are designed to provide immediate operation yet minimize the possibility of an inadvertent operation. This is accomplished by requiring that the first action of the knob “wakes up” the knob and changes the label from cyan to magenta.
The first click when the knob is turned or the first press on the knob, “wakes up” the knob function.
Press the knob more than once to cycle through its Menu options in a round-robin sequence or press and hold the knob to synchronize (SYNC) the function’s value
(see
Section 2.2.1.3. SYNC Function).
After 10 seconds of inactivity, the knob returns to its default setting.
Page 2-4
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-5
Page 2-4
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
2.2.1.1. Left Knob Functions
The Left Knob is used to set the Course (CRS) and Airspeed Bug (IAS). Course (CRS) is the default setting for the Left Knob.
Refer to
Table 2-1
and
Figure 2-2
• Rotate the Left Knob one click or Press the knob once to set the course (CRS)
(
Refs. 46 and 51
and
see
NOTE
about Auto Course)
• Press the Left Knob twice to set the Airspeed Bug (IAS) and Selected Airspeed
Field (
Refs. 33 and 34
)
2.2.1.2. Right Knob Functions
The Right Knob is used to set Heading (HDG), Selected Altitude Field (ALT), Barometric
Pressure (BARO), and Instrument Approach Minimums (MIN)
1
. Successive presses of the Right Knob will cycle through HDG and ALT (and MIN
1
, if selected) in a round-robin sequence. Rotate the Right Knob to the left or right to decrease or increase the value of selected field. Heading (HDG) is the default setting for the Right Knob.
Refer to
Table 2-1
and
Figure 2-2
• Rotate the Right Knob one click or Press the knob once to set the Selected
Heading Field/Heading Bug (HDG) (
Refs. 52 and 53
)
• Press the Right Knob twice to set the Selected Altitude Field (ALT)/Altitude
Bug (
Refs. 22 and 26
)
• When the MIN Hot Key is selected
1
, press the Right Knob three times to set the Selected Minimums Field (MIN) (
Ref. 28
)
NOTE
1
MIN will only be shown if the MIN function is already active. When the MIN function is active, the MIN Hot
Key label (
Ref. 5
) is shown in green with dark blue letters, and the MIN value is shown on the Attitude
Display (
Ref. 28
).
When the MIN function is inactive (blue label with green letters), pressing the MIN Hot Key will both activate the function and immediately make it available for editing.
NOTE
When the CDI navigation source is selected to a GPS receiver and the Auto Course is enabled in the Menu, the course is set automatically by the GPS and is not pilot-adjustable (see
Section 4.4.6
). This state is indicated by the CRS field and Knob label shown in green with an inverse “A”. In this case, pressing the Left
Knob will enable you to set only the Airspeed Bug (IAS).
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-5
Page 2-6
Figure 2-3
Left and Right Knobs and Corresponding Fields
2.2.1.3.
SYNC Function
Knob SYNC Function
1. Press the Knob until its state shows the value you want to set in magenta.
2. Press and hold the Knob for approximately one (1) second to SYNC the field’s value according to the rules shown in
Table 2-2
.
3. After 10 seconds of inaction, the knob reverts to its home state (CRS or HDG), and the labels and field turn to cyan (inactive).
Right Knob
SYNC Action
ALT
Altitude Bug and Altitude Alerter are set to the current altitude.
MIN Set to the current altitude.
BARO Set to 29.92 in Hg or 1013 mB.
HDG Set to the current heading.
Right Knob -Current State default setting:
HDG
Cyan indicates field is inactive.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-7
Page 2-6
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Left Knob
SYNC Action
IAS Set to the current indicated airspeed.
CRS
VOR navigation
ILS navigation
Course Pointer points to the VOR. CRS value is the reciprocal of the current VOR radial. The deviation bar centers with a “TO” indication.
Current aircraft heading.
GPS
Course Pointer points to the active GPS waypoint. The deviation bar centers with a “TO” indication. (AUTOCRS must be disabled).
GPS
AUTOCRS enabled
No effect.
Left Knob - Current State default setting:
CRS
Cyan indicates field is inactive.
Table 2-2
Left and Right Knob SYNC Description
091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-7
Figure 2-5
Editing the HDG field
Figure 2-6
HDG field updated and inactive
Page 2-8
2.2.1.4. Using the Knobs (Example)
How to Set the Heading Bug (HDG)
1. Rotate the Right Knob to the desired heading value, shown both by the position of the Heading Bug and the numeric value in the Selected Heading
Field (
Figure 2-5
). The HDG label, Heading Bug and the Selected Heading
Field appears in magenta
2. After 10 seconds of inactivity, the knob defaults to HDG. The HDG label,
Heading Bug and Selected Heading Field value will appear in cyan (
Figure
2-6
).
2.2.2. Navigation Source Select Buttons
1
The three buttons on the bottom of the PFD (
Figure 2-7
) allow the pilot to select the navigation source for the CDI and Bearing Pointers (
see
Section 4.4.5. CDI Navigation
Source
and
Section 4.4.8. Bearing Pointer Source Selection
for more detailed information).
Single-Line Bearing
Pointer Source
CDI Nav
Source
Double-Line Bearing
Pointer Source
Figure 2-7
CDI and Bearing Pointer Source Select Buttons
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-9
Page 2-8
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
2.2.2.1. CDI Navigation Source Select Button
1
The CDI Nav Source Select Button is the center button (
Figure 2-7
). It selects which of the available navigation sources will couple to the CDI, which in turn couples to the autopilot (if available). Each press of the CDI Nav Source Button selects the next available nav source, cycling through all available sources in a round-robin sequence.
The currently coupled CDI nav source is displayed directly above the CDI Nav Source
Select Button.
The available navigation sources are configured when the PFD was installed (depending on what is installed in the aircraft and connected to the PFD). The available navigation source choices are: GPS1, GPS2, VLOC1, and VLOC2.
If a navigation source is configured to be available, but is not providing valid navigation data, its navigation source annunciation will be shown with a red slash through it, and the CDI will not be shown with the Course Pointer. The pilot is able to select the invalid source, but no navigation data is provided.
When one or more of the connected navigation sources is a combined GPS/Nav device
(e.g., some of the Garmin 400/500-series), the list of navigation sources available for selection will be determined by the current CDI mode of the GPS navigator.
NOTE
The Pilot PFD does not display any CDI or Bearing
Pointers. Its center CDI Nav Source Select Button is used only to select which connected GPS source (GPS1 or
GPS2) is used to display the GPS flight plan, waypoints , and basemap symbols.
NOTE
When GPS is selected as the CDI’s nav source, but no active waypoint is programmed in the GPS navigator, that source will be shown as invalid until an active flight plan or direct-to waypoint is programmed into the GPS.
For example, with a Garmin GNS-430 installed as the #1 navigation source, when “GPS” is shown immediately above the CDI Button on the GNS-430, the PFD will show GPS1 as an available , but invalid, nav source. When the pilot presses the CDI Button on the GNS-430 so that VLOC is now displayed on the
GNS-430, the PFD will show VLOC1 as the available nav source, and GPS1 cannot be selected.
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-9
Page 2-10
2.2.2.2. Bearing Pointer Source Select Buttons
1
The Left Button and the Right Button are the Bearing Pointer Nav Source Select Buttons
(
Figure 2-7
). The Left Button controls the Single-Line Bearing Pointer and the Right
Button controls the Double-Line Bearing Pointer. Each button controls which nav source is connected to the respective Bearing Pointer.
The Bearing Pointers act like a conventional RMI (Radio Magnetic Indicator); the needle points to the station. Unlike a conventional RMI, the PFD Bearing Pointers can also point to the active waypoint of a GPS navigator whether that is a VOR, NDB, airport, intersection, or missed approach point.
Each Bearing Pointer can be connected to any of the available navigation sources; GPS1,
VOR1, GPS2, VOR2, ADF1 or ADF2 (depending on configuration), or to none. Each press of the Bearing Pointer Nav Source Select Button selects the next available nav source, cycling through all available nav sources and none, in a round-robin sequence. The currently connected nav source is displayed directly above its respective button; blank with only the Bearing Pointer icon indicates that no nav source is selected, and the
Bearing Pointer is removed from the display.
If the selected nav source is a valid choice, but no usable nav data is being received
(e.g., the VOR station is out of range, or the VLOC is tuned to a localizer frequency), the
Bearing Pointer will not be displayed.
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-11
Page 2-10
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
2.2.3. Hot Keys
The five keys along the lower right side of the PFD function as either single-action
Hot Keys for frequently used commands or as Menu Keys when the Menu has been activated. The Hot Key functions are accessible at any time, except when the Menu is active.
Each Hot Key provides instant access to the assigned command. Each press of a Hot Key toggles between the settings that each key controls (
see
Table 2-3
).
The Hot Key labels use the following color philosophy (
see
Figure 2-8
and
Figure 2-9
).
• A green label and dark blue letters (also known as inverse green) indicates that the Hot Key function is enabled
• A dark blue label and green letters indicates that the Hot Key function is diabled
• A dark blue label and gray letters indicates that the Hot Key function is not available
• A dark blue label without letters indicates that the Hot Key has no function
The 360/ARC Hot Key labels indicate which mode is currently active on the Navigation
Display.
NOTE
1
When configured with the Evolution Hazard Awareness option, there are two levels of Hot Keys controlled by the first Hot Key (1/2 or 2/2). The second level
(2/2) provides access to Hazard Awareness overlays as described in
Chapter 4, Section 4.8. Hazard
Awareness
.
NOTE
The TRFC Filter Hot Key is blank when Traffic Software
Option is not installed.
091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
Page 2-11
Figure 2-8
Hot Key Menu 1 of 2
Page 2-12
HOT KEY
1/2 1
MIN
1
DESCRIPTION
Hot Key Menu selection
Enables and displays, or disables and hides, Minimums
Alerter 1, 2 (
see
Section 4.2.3.4.
)
OPTIONS
1/2
Hot Key Menu 1 of 2
2/2
Hot Key Menu 2 of 2
5
MIN
Minimums displayed and
Altitude Alerter enabled 2
MIN
Minimums alerter disabled
360 / ARC
Toggles between 360 and ARC modes of Navigation Display
(
see
Section 4.4.1.
)
360
ARC Compass Mode
ARC
360° Compass Mode
GPSS
1, 3, 4
BARO
Toggles between GPS Steering
(GPSS) Mode and HDG mode for Autopilot/Flight Director
4
(
see
Section 4.7.1.
)
GPSS
GPSS on
GPSS
GPSS Off, HDG mode active
Toggles between BARO adjustment on or off for
Barometric Pressure setting
BARO
BARO adjustment on
BARO
BARO adjustment off
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-13
Page 2-12
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
HOT KEY
2/2
1 , 5
LTNG
1, 5
DESCRIPTION
Hot Key Menu selection
Toggles between Lightning
Overlay options (
see
Section
4.8.1.
)
OPTIONS
2/2
Hot Key Menu 2 of 2
1/2
Hot Key Menu 1 of 2
LTNG
Data Link Lightning Overlay on
STRK
WX-500 Strike Overlay on
CELL
WX-500 Cell Overlay on
LTNG
All Lightning off
Displays Data Link Weather and
Radar Coverage overlay (
see
Section 4.8.2.
)
Displays Traffic overlay (
see
Section 4.8.3.
)
NXRD
NEXRAD Overlay on
NXRD
1, 5
TRFC 1, 6
NXRD
NEXRAD Overlay off
TFCN
Normal Filter
TFCU
Unrestricted (No Filtering)
TFCA
Above Filter
TFCB
Below Filter
TRFC
Traffic Overlay off
BARO
BARO adjustment on
BARO
BARO adjustment off
BARO
1
Toggles between BARO adjustment on or off for
Barometric Pressure setting
Table 2-3
Hot Key Descriptions
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
2. When the Minimums field is first enabled with the MIN Hot Key, the MIN value is immediately available for editing
3. Flight plan legs and waypoints display available in all installations including a GPS navigator. Basemap display of nearby waypoints available with all ARINC 429 GPS navigators and some RS-232 GPS navigators
4. GPSS available with ARINC 429 or RS-232 GPS navigators
5. Hazard awareness overlays are available only on the Pro PFD with the Evolution Hazard Awareness (EHA) option and compatible hazard awareness sensors are installed and configured to the Pro PFD. The Hot Key label is blank when function is not available
6. The Traffic Filter Hot Key label is blank when the Traffic overlay function is not available
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 2-9
Hot Key Menu 2 of 2
Page 2-13
Figure 2-15
Menu Navigation Mode
Page 2-14
2.2.4. Menu
The MENU button is used to access the EFD1000 PFD’s Menu to change options, and also to change the PFD’s display brightness.
2.2.4.1. Using the Menus
Press the MENU button to activate the Menu (
Ref. 3
). The current menu page name is shown on the bottom center of the Navigation Display. Directly below the menu page name is a segmented menu page bar, giving a graphical representation of the current page relative to the total number of menu pages. The current menu page number is shown in the lower right corner of the Navigation Display.
Menu Page 1, General Settings A, is the one most commonly used in flight. It allows the pilot to enable or disable the AUTO COURSE SELECT mode, to display or hide the
Vspeeds on the airspeed tape, and to choose CDI type for the ARC Compass mode.
The other menu pages are used for barometric pressure and Outside Air Temperature
(OAT) units of measure settings, Auto Range, Vspeeds and map customization, PFD power management, product version information, and information and option settings, relative to your specific equipment and installed options.
The Menu operates either in the Navigation or Edit mode, as indicated by the label directly above the Right Knob. When the MENU button is first pressed, the Main Menu is in the Navigation mode, indicated by the magenta label SEL PAGE directly above the Right Knob
(Figure 2-15)
. When in the Navigation mode, rotating the Right Knob navigates through the menu pages. Rotate the Right Knob clockwise to advance to the next menu page, counterclockwise to return to the previous page.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-15
Page 2-14
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Each Menu Page has up to five selectable options, each adjacent to one of the five
Hot Keys which double as Menu Keys when the Menu is active (
Item 1
of
Figure 2-17
and
Table 2-4
). After navigating to the Menu Page containing the option you want to change, press the Menu Key adjacent to that option label, which initiates the Menu’s
Edit mode. When the Menu is in the Edit mode, the label, EDIT VALUE, is shown above the Right Knob in magenta (
Figure 2-16
), and the label of the item selected for editing is also shown in magenta. Rotate the Right Knob to change the value of the selected item. When finished, either select another displayed Menu option to change , or press the Right Knob to exit the Edit mode and return to Navigation mode to select another
Menu Page.
When you are finished changing Menu options, press the MENU Button to exit.
Menu Options
Menu Page number and mode (Navigation mode shown)
Menu Page Name
Menu Page graphical bar
Brightness Control (
see
Section 2.2.4.2.
)
Table 2-4
Menu
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 2-16
Menu Edit Mode
Figure 2-17
Main Menu
Page 2-15
Figure 2-18
Menu Text - Editable
Figure 2-19
Menu Text - Enabled for Editing
Figure 2-20
Menu Text - Status Only
Figure 2-21
Menu Text - Disabled
Figure 2-22
Menu Display
Page 2-16
The MENU text will display in one of the four colors listed and described in
Table 2-5
.
DISPLAY
TEXT
WHITE
DESCRIPTION
Editable option
MAGENTA
Editable option enabled
GREEN
GRAY
Table 2-4
Menu Text
Status Only
Disabled (Not available for selection or editing)
DISPLAY
Figure 2-18
Figure 2-19
Figure 2-20
Figure 2-21
NOTE
These steps are provided as a basic overview. Each menu command is covered in detail in
Chapter 5
.
Access To and Navigation Within the Menu
1. Press the MENU button. The Menu displays on the Navigation Display adjacent to the Hot Keys (
Figure 2-22
).
2. Rotate the Right Knob to navigate through the different pages of the
Menu. Rotating the Right Knob clockwise advances the Menu Pages, counterclockwise returns to previous pages.
3. Press the MENU Button to exit.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-17
Page 2-16
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Edit Main Menu Items
1. Press the MENU Button.
2. Navigate to the desired Menu Page.
3. Press the Menu Key of the desired option. The Menu label turns magenta, and the EDIT VALUE label displays above the Right Knob (
Figure 2-23
).
4. Rotate the Right Knob to the desired value.
5. Press the Right Knob to return to Menu navigation mode.
6. Press the MENU Button to exit.
NOTE
Pressing the Right Knob returns to Navigation mode and allows selection of other menu options on different pages. Pressing another menu key on the current menu page saves any changes made and activates the newly selected option for editing.
091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 2-23
EDIT VALUE Displays Above Right Knob
NOTE
Upon reaching the end of a list of editable menu options, continued rotation of the knob will not result in the continuous wrapping through the available editable menu options. Spinning the knob fully clockwise will go to the last menu page, while spinning the knob fully counterclockwise will go to the first menu page.
Page 2-17
Figure 2-24
Display Brightness in BRT AUTO Mode
Figure 2-25
Display Brightness in BRT ADJUST Mode
2.2.4.2. Display Lighting
When the MENU button is pressed and the Menu is active, the Left Knob can be used to adjust the PFD display brightness.
By default, the LCD brightness operates in AUTO mode, and is adjusted based on photocell sensing of ambient lighting conditions. When the MENU is active and the
LCD is in the BRT AUTO mode, the word, “AUTO”, and a brightness level of 1-100 will be displayed in green above the Left Knob (
Figure 2-24
).
To override the AUTO brightness setting, press the Left Knob once to switch to the BRT
ADJUST mode, and then rotate the Left Knob to set the brightness to the desired level
(
Figure 2-25
). To return to AUTO brightness control, press the Left Knob again.
LCD MODE DESCRIPTION
Automatic
BRT AUTO
Manual
BRT ADJUST
LCD backlight intensity is automatically adjusted based on the ambient lighting conditions sensed by the
Automatic Dimming Photocell. The maximum intensity in AUTO mode is 70%.
Allows the pilot to adjust the PFD display brightness from 1-100%
Table 2-5
Brightness Control
DISPLAY
Figure 2-24
Figure 2-25
NOTE
The BRT AUTO display brightness level is determined by the amount of light detected by the photocell on the front of the PFD. If a light is used to illuminate the instrument panel, the photocell will respond, resulting in a bright display. When this happens, use the manual
BRT ADJUST mode to reduce the brightness.
Page 2-18
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-19
Page 2-18
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
2.2.5. Range Buttons
When the MAP is enabled, the RNG (Range) Button is used to zoom the map in or out.
Press the RNG (+) Button to increase map range. Press the RNG (-) Button to decrease map range. Additionally, an Auto Range control feature is available.
Pressing and holding either the RNG (+) or (-) Button will cause the map range to scale continuously to its maximum or minimum range, respectively. When the map range is at its maximum or minimum setting, release and then press and hold the RNG Button again to activate the Auto Range control mode (
see
Section 4.4.12.1.
for more details).
2.2.6. REV Button
The red REV Button on the PFD can be used to override automatic power control in abnormal or emergency situations (
see
Chapter 6, Section 6.4.
and
Figure 6-29
for more details).
091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-19
Figure 2-26
PFD Display Areas
Page 2-20
2.3. Display
The PFD replaces the existing Attitude Indicator and HSI or DG in the center of the primary flight instrument cluster. Like the instruments it replaces, the top half presents an Attitude Display and the bottom half contains a Navigation Display (
Figure 2-26
).
Between the two halves is the Data Bar. The Data Bar contains a dedicated display of real-time winds, Outside Air Temperature (OAT), True Airspeed (TAS), and GPS Ground
Speed (GS).
Attitude Display
Data Bar
Navigation Display
Unlike the mechanical indicators it typically replaces, PFD can also display all the data provided by the remaining four instruments in the six pack (airspeed, altitude, turn and slip, and vertical speed), and much more. Concentrating all primary flight information onto a single instrument directly in front of the pilot improves instrument scan and reduces pilot workload, thereby enhancing safety, especially in busy phases of flight.
Additionally, analog backup instruments can be retained in the pilot’s primary field of view, and should be included in the instrument scan to cross-check indications of both the primary (EFIS) and backup (analog) instruments.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-21
Page 2-20
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
The PFD generally follows standard display conventions for Electronic Flight Instrument
Systems (EFIS), so a pilot with some experience and familiarity with other EFIS PFDs will usually transition quickly to using the EFD1000. Pilots for whom the EFD1000
PFD is their first real exposure to EFIS and glass cockpit flying, however, should get some transition training from a certified instrument flight instructor (CFII) with EFIS experience. Pilots are also encouraged to study some of the excellent publications and training videos now available to help with the transition.
This section gives an overview of the main display elements and features. (
see
Chapter
4, Reference Guide
for more details).
2.3.1. Cleaning the Display Screen
The PFD Display Unit has an LCD screen that is prone to damage from scratches, smudging, and clouding caused by the use of improper cleaning agents and abrasive cloths. Exercise care when cleaning, using the following tips:
• Only clean the display when the PFD is off.
• Use a clean, soft, lint-free cloth dampened with a 50/50 solution of isopropyl alcohol and water, a pre-moistened lens cleaning tissue, such as Bausch &
Lomb Sight Savers®, or a cleaning solution made especially for LCD displays.
• Never spray any cleaning solutions directly onto the screen; spray it into the cleaning cloth.
• Gently wipe the screen in a circular motion. Do not press hard on the screen.
• Remove all excess moisture to prevent damage to the display.
• The display should be dry before turning on the PFD.
CAUTION
Use caution when using isopropyl alcohol as it is flammable. Using any other chemicals or materials voids the warranty.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-21
Page 2-22
2.3.2. Attitude Display
The Attitude Display includes an Attitude Director Indicator (ADI) with a singlecue Flight Director command V-bars (when connected to a compatible autopilot), an Airspeed tape, an Altimeter tape, an Altitude Alerter, Radio Altitude, approach minimums annunciations, and approach course and glide slope indicators (
Table 2-7
and
Figure 2-27
), (
see
Chapter 4, Reference Guide
for more details).
The Airspeed and Altitude tapes are the most obvious differences from a mechanical
ADI. These tapes are common on most EFIS PFDs and will be immediately familiar to pilots with EFIS experience. Pilots without prior EFIS experience may need some training and experience to become to get comfortable with the Airspeed and Altimeter tapes as their primary references.
In single-display PFD installations, where the mechanical airspeed indicator and altimeter remain in their original locations, transitioning pilots can use either their familiar mechanical instruments or the PFD tapes for airspeed and altitude references.
Many pilots new to EFIS quickly find themselves relying on the tapes within a flight or two. Should the tapes prove distracting, the pilot can remove them from the display by disabling them in the Menu. (Page 1, GENERAL SETTINGS A — single display installations only).
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-23
Page 2-22
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
ATTITUDE DISPLAY
16
Attitude Display
17
Aircraft Reference Symbol
18
Single-Cue Flight Director 1, 2
19
Roll Pointer
20
Slip/Skid Indicator
21
Altitude Tape
22
Selected Altitude Field
23
Altitude Alerter
24
Numerical Altitude Value,
Altitude Drum/Pointer
25
26
Altitude Trend Vector
Altitude Bug
Table 2-6
Attitude Display Components
31
32
33
34
35
27
28
29
30
36
37
Decision Height Annunciation 2, 3
Selected Minimums Field 2
Radio Altitude 2, 3
MINIMUMS Marker 2
LDI Navigation Source Annunciation 2
Airspeed Tape
Selected Airspeed Field
Airspeed Bug
Numerical Airspeed Value, Airspeed
Drum/Pointer
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
2
Lateral Deviation Indicator (LDI)
2
33
27
32
35
34
18
29
31
23
22
17
16
30
21
28
36
24
25
26
30
37
Figure 2-27
Attitude Display Components
1. With compatible autopilots
2. Not available with the Pilot PFD
3. With compatible radar altimeters
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-23
Figure 2-28
Slip/Skid
Figure 2-29
Flight Director
Page 2-24
2.3.2.1.
Attitude Director Indicator (ADI)
The Attitude Director Indicator (ADI) features a conventional blue (sky) over brown
(ground) background, with a white horizon line dividing the two areas. A triangular
Aircraft Reference Symbol (
Ref. 17
) is in a fixed position and shows aircraft attitude relative to the horizon.
The pitch scale (or ladder) indicates degrees of nose up (blue) or nose down (brown) pitch relative to the apex of the aircraft symbol. Minor pitch marks are shown every
2.5º up to +/-20º of pitch, with major pitch marks every 10º up to +/-90º of pitch. The distance between pitch marks is greater than on most mechanical attitude indicators, making it easier for the pilot to fly more precise pitch attitudes.
At extreme pitch attitudes (above 30º nose up or below 25º nose down), red Unusual
Attitude Recovery chevrons come into view, pointing towards the horizon or ground as applicable (
see
Chapter 4, Section 4.2.1.2. Pitch Scale
). At extreme pitch attitudes, some sky (blue) or ground (brown) will always be displayed to help maintain situational awareness, even though the horizon line may be off-scale.
At the top of the ADI are the roll scale, roll pointer, and slip/skid indicator (
Figure 2-28
).
The roll scale is indicated by tick marks at 10º, 20º, 30º, 45º, and 60º on both sides of the zero roll inverted solid white triangle. The 45º marks are represented as hollow triangles.
Slip/skid is indicated by the lateral position of the white rectangle under the roll pointer.
One rectangle width is equivalent to one ball width of a conventional inclinometer.
When connected to a compatible autopilot system, the PFD will display a single-cue
Flight Director (FD) (
Figure 2-29
). The Flight Director command bars visually represent the lateral and vertical steering cues transmitted to the PFD by the autopilot. When the FD output from the autopilot is unavailable or invalid, the FD command bars are removed from the display.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-25
Page 2-24
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
2.3.2.2. Airspeed Tape and Bug
Airspeed is indicated by a moving airspeed tape against a fixed position airspeed pointer, shown on the left-hand side of the Attitude Display (
Figure 2-30
). A numerical, rolling drum readout indicating airspeed values to the closest one knot or mile per hour is provided adjacent to the fixed pointer. Tick marks are provided on the airspeed tape every 10 knots (or mph, if so configured). Airspeeds between 20 kts (23 mph) to 450 kts
(518 mph) are displayed. Outside of this range, the airspeed value is dashed.
Color speed bands are displayed on the indicated airspeed tape, corresponding to the color arcs found on a mechanical airspeed indicator.
Color speed markers are also displayed on the indicated airspeed tape, corresponding to the markers found on traditional airspeed indicators. All aircraft have a red line for aircraft never-exceed speed (Vne). Multi-engine aircraft will usually also have another red line for single-engine minimum control speed (Vmc), and a blue line for singleengine best rate of climb speed (Vyse). If the aircraft manufacturer has published an initial flap extension speed, a white triangle will be presented on the airspeed tape at this speed.
Redline or Barber Pole airspeed limits that vary with pressure altitude can be displayed when configured by the installer. The colors are configured to correspond with your aircraft’s approved markings on the mechanical airspeed indicator.
Textual Vspeed markers can also be shown on the airspeed tape (e.g., Vx, Vy, Va, etc.).
These are typically programmed at installation, and (if left unlocked during installation) may also be adjusted by the pilot. Vspeed display can be enabled or disabled by the pilot from Page 1 of the Menu (
see
Chapter 5
).
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 2-30
Airspeed Tape
Page 2-25
Figure 2-30a
Mach Number Display
Page 2-26
The pilot can set a target airspeed using the Left Knob (
see
Section 4.2.2.1.
). The target airspeed is shown on the Airspeed Tape as an Airspeed Bug with its setting displayed numerically above the Airspeed Tape (
Figure 4-10
and
Figure 4-11
). The Airspeed
Bug and numerical value are for visual reference only, to help the pilot maintain a target airspeed; there is no alerting for deviations from the target.
2.3.2.2.a. Mach Number Display for Mmo Aircraft
The Mach number for Mmo aircraft is displayed in the Data Bar (
Figure 2-30a
). The
Mach number can be configured to be displayed whenever the aircraft is above the selected transition altitude or above a selected Mach number.
When the configuration is set to ALTITUDE transition, the TAS indication will be replaced by the Mach number whenever the aircraft is above the selected transition altitude.
When the configuration is set to SPEED transition, the TAS indication will be replaced by the Mach number whenever the aircraft is above the selected transition Mach number (
see
Chapter 5, Table 5-2
for MACH Display setting options)
.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-27
Page 2-26
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
2.3.2.3. Altitude Tape, Altitude Alerter, and Vertical Speed
Altitude is indicated by a moving altitude tape against a fixed position altitude pointer
(
Figure 2-2, No. 21, 24
), shown on the right-hand side of the Attitude Display
(
Figure 2-31
). A numerical rolling drum readout indicating altitude values to the closest
20 feet is provided adjacent to the fixed pointer. When climbing or descending, a magenta Altitude Trend Vector displays above or below the altitude pointer, indicating the altitude that will be reached in six seconds if the current rate of climb or descent is maintained.
Minor tick marks are provided on the tape at 20-foot intervals, and major tick marks are provided at 100-foot intervals. The thousand and ten-thousand digits are larger than other digits on the tape. Negative altitudes are indicated by a “-“ sign preceding the numerical altitude value in the drum.
The current altimeter barometric pressure setting is shown just below the Altitude tape in the Data Bar (
Figure 2-2, No. 39
), and can be adjusted by pressing the BARO Hot Key and rotating the Right Knob.
The Altitude Tape also includes a built-in Altitude Alerter, which consists of an
Altitude Bug on the Altitude Tape (
Figure 2-2, No. 26
), a Selected Altitude Field
(
Figure 2-2, No. 22
), a visual Altitude alert (
Figure 2-2, No. 23
), and an optional audio alert. For more information on using the Altitude Alerter,
see
Chapter 3
and
Chapter 4
.
A Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) is shown as a tape on the Navigation Display (
Figure
2-48
and
Figure 2-2, No. 57
) to the right of the HSI in 360 Compass mode. A numerical vertical rate is shown in the upper right-hand corner of the Navigation Display during climbs and descents
(Figure 2-2, No. 56)
. The VSI tape is not shown in ARC Compass mode, but the numerical value display is shown in both 360 and ARC Compass modes.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 2-31
Altitude Tape
Page 2-27
Figure 2-32
Instrument Approach Indications
Figure 2-33
Decision Height Annunciation
Page 2-28
2.3.2.4. Instrument Approach Indicators
1
Additional indicators are shown on the Attitude Display when flying certain types of instrument approaches. These enable the pilot to maintain a tighter instrument scan on the ADI, reducing workload and improving safety (
Figure 2-32
).
A Lateral Deviation Indicator (LDI) (
Figure 2-2, No. 37
) is presented on the attitude indicator whenever the pilot has selected an ILS, LOC, LOC Back Course (BC), or a GPS approach and valid lateral course guidance is being received. The LDI’s navigation source is annunciated to the left of the LDI (
Figure 2-2, No. 31
). A Vertical Deviation Indicator
(VDI) (
Figure 2-2, No. 34
)) is presented on the attitude indicator whenever the LDI is shown and valid glide slope signal is being received, such as from an ILS or WAAS GPS LPV.
Whenever the lateral or vertical deviation exceeds the maximum displayable range of
LDI or VDI scale (2.5 dots), the deviation diamond turns into a hollow, ghosted image pegged to the corresponding side. As soon as the deviation diamond comes into range, the diamond turns solid green, making it easy to identify when the needle is “alive”.
Additionally, the pilot can pre-set the instrument approach minimums (MIN) with the MIN Hot Key. Once the MIN data field value is set to a Decision Altitude, Decision
Height, or Minimum Descent Altitude, the PFD provides a MINIMUMS annunciation when the aircraft reaches or descends below this altitude (
Figure 2-2, No. 28
).
Additionally there are three minimums markers shown on the altitude tape — a green marker 500 feet above minimums; a hollow yellow triangle in the area from 100 feet to
200 feet above minimums; and a red and yellow marker at the programmed Selected
Minimums value (
see
Section 4.2.3.4. MINIMUMS Annunciation
for more details).
If a Radar Altimeter is installed in the aircraft and connected to the PFD, a Decision
Height annunciation (
Figure 2-2, No. 27
and
No. 29
) will be displayed when the aircraft descends to, or below, the selected radar altitude (
Figure 2-33
).
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-29
Page 2-28
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
2.3.3. Data Bar
The Data Bar visually separates the upper and lower halves of the PFD display. When available, True Airspeed (TAS) or Mach Number, GPS Ground Speed (GS), Outside Air
Temperature (OAT), Wind Vector arrow, Wind Direction, Wind Speed, and Barometric
Pressure Setting are presented in the Data Bar (
Table 2-8
and
Figure 2-34
).
When any of these values are not available or invalid, the corresponding data field is dashed. If the Wind Direction and Speed are not available or invalid the Wind Direction
Arrow is removed. A GPS navigator must be connected and providing valid ground speed and ground track to display GS and wind data.
The Data Bar is discussed in detail in
Section 4.3.
DATA BAR
38 True Airspeed (TAS) or Mach Number
39 Barometric Pressure Setting Field
40 Wind Direction and Speed
41 Wind Direction Arrow
42 Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
43 Ground Speed (GS)
Table 2-7
Data Bar Components
38
43 42 41
39
40
Figure 2-34
Data Bar Components
NOTE
When the winds aloft are less than 10 knots, the wind data is not displayed.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-29
NOTE
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and Lateral
Deviation Indicator (LDI) are part of the navigation instruments and are displayed on the Attitude Display during instrument approaches.
2.3.4. Navigation Display
The lower half of the PFD is the Navigation Display (
Table 2-9
and
Figure 2-35
), which shows a wide range of navigation information and flight data, including:
• Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI), Course Pointer and Deviation Indicator
(CDI), and Heading Bug.
• 360° and ARC Compass rose display modes.
• Numeric displays of current magnetic heading, selected heading (HDG), and selected course (CRS).
• Information about the selected CDI navigation source, or active GPS waypoint.
• Ground Track Marker.
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) tape and numerical rate value.
• Rate of Turn Indicator.
• Dual bearing pointers (RMI) (360° Compass mode only).
• Situational Awareness Map display.
• Course Deviation Indicators (CDI) and Bearing Pointers, navigation source information.
• GPS annunciations (TERM, APPR, WPT, and MSG).
• Caution annunciations for abnormal GPS status.
When connected to a GPS navigator, basic mapping can also be displayed under the HSI, including GPS flight plan legs and waypoints, (and when connected to a compatible GPS) Basemap data (airports, VORs, NDBs, and intersections).
Page 2-30
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-31
Page 2-30
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
NAVIGATION DISPLAY
44
Navigation Display
45
Ownship Symbol
46 Course Pointer
1
47
TO/FROM Indicator 1
48
Rate of Turn Indicator
49 Ground Track Marker
50
Numerical Direction Indicator
51 Selected Course (CRS) Field
1
52
Selected Heading (HDG) Field
53
Heading Bug
54
Course Deviation Scale 1
55
Course Deviation Indicator 1
56 Vertical Speed Numerical Value
57 Vertical Speed Indicator Tape
Table 2-8
Navigation Display Components
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
58
Single-Line Bearing Pointer 1
59
Single-Line Bearing Pointer Navigation
Source
1
60 Single-Line Bearing Pointer Navigation
Source Info Block 1
61
Double-Line Bearing Pointer 1
62
Double-Line Bearing Pointer Navigation
Source
1
63 Double-Line Bearing Pointer Navigation
Source Info Block 1
64
Selected CDI Navigation Source 1
65 Selected CDI Navigation Source
Information Block 1
66
Left Knob State
67
Right Knob State
68
Hot Key Legend
69
Navigation Display Range
70 Navigation Display Declutter Level
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
65
69
70
66
51
46
49
50
48
53
61
47
55
45
54
44
60
59
64
52
58
56
57
68
62
63
67
Figure 2-35
Navigation Display Components
Page 2-31
Page 2-32
Figure 2-36
360° Compass Mode
Figure 2-37
ARC CDI Compass
Mode with Basemap
2.3.4.1. Numerical Direction Indicator (Magnetic Compass)
The center of the Navigation Display is the Numerical Direction Indicator. Like a magnetic compass, the NDI always shows the current magnetic heading of the aircraft.
This slaved NDI compensates both for the turning and acceleration errors exhibited by wet compasses and for precession errors found in common Directional Gyros. The pilot does not ever need to make adjustments to the NDI.
The NDIs of both the Pilot PFD and the Pro PFD share many common features, while the
Pro PFD adds features for instrument navigation.
The Pilot PFD Direction Indicator is a slaved Directional Gyro (DG) with Heading Bug.
The Pro PFD Direction Indicator adds an electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) and dual Bearing Pointers. The HSI features are explained in
Section 2.3.4.2.
Compass Modes: 360º vs. ARC
The NDI on the PFD can be presented in either a full 360º Compass Mode (shown in
Figure 2-36
), or in a 100º ARC mode (
Figure 2-37
).
The 360° Compass Mode resembles the mechanical instrument, with the ownship position in the center of the display.
The ARC Compass Mode provides an extended forward view with the ownship position near the bottom of the Navigation Display. The ARC Compass is especially good for displaying flight plan and basemap details.
The 360/ARC Hot Key is used to toggle the display between 360° and ARC Compass
Modes, with the current mode shown in green adjacent to the Hot Key.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-33
Page 2-32
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Navigation Information
Regardless of Compass Mode setting, the current magnetic heading is always shown at the top center of the Navigation Display (
Figure 2-2, No. 50
and
Figure 2-38
). The
HDG Bug setting is shown in the Selected Heading Field (
Figure 2-2, No. 52
). This field is always visible even if the HDG Bug itself is only partially visible in ARC Compass Mode.
Similarly, on the EFD1000 Pro PFD HSI, the current Course setting (CRS) (
Figure 2-2, No.
51
) is always shown, whether or not the Course Pointer itself is visible in ARC Compass
Mode.
A Selected CDI Navigation Source Information Block (
Figure 2-2, No. 65
and
Figure
2-39
) is presented in the upper left corner of the Navigation Display. The Source
Information Block indicates the Selected CDI Navigation Source (coupled to the CDI on the Pro PFD HSI), and its associated mode (e.g., GPS, VOR, ILS, LOC) . Information is provided about the selected source, including, when available, the waypoint identifier or navaid frequency, waypoint bearing and distance, and the estimated time to the active waypoint.
Ground Track Marker
When the PFD is connected to a compatible GPS, a blue Ground Track Marker is displayed on the compass rose at the value that corresponds to the aircraft’s ground track (
Figure 2-2, No. 49
and
Figure 2-40
).
When the Ground Track Marker is aligned with the Course Pointer on the Pro PFD HSI, the aircraft is tracking on, or parallel to its desired track.
To align the Ground Track Marker with the Course Pointer, turn away from the direction in which the diamond is offset from the Course Pointer (think of it as a turn to pull the
Ground Track Marker toward the Course Pointer).
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 2-38
Magnetic Heading
Figure 2-39
Navigation Source Information Block
Figure 2-40
Ground Track Marker
Page 2-33
Page 2-34
2.3.4.2. Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
1
The traditional HSI is an instrument that combines a slaved magnetic Heading Indicator overlaid with a rotating Course Pointer and Course Deviation Indicator (CDI). This combination helps the pilot better visualize the aircraft’s position relative to the desired course. The HSI is a vast improvement over the older, separate Directional Gyro (DG) and OBS course deviation indicator, because the compass heading is always correct (slaved to a remote magnetic flux detector), and the integration of the CDI onto the compass simplifies the instrument scan and provides better situational awareness.
Pilots experienced with the mechanical HSI will find the PFD 360º Compass Mode immediately familiar. In its basic form, it is just an electronic representation of a mechanical
HSI. Pilots transitioning from flying a DG and OBS should seek dual instruction from a CFII on the differences in flying an HSI.
2.3.4.3. Course Pointer and Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
1
In the 360º Compass Mode, the Course Pointer and CDI resemble those of a mechanical HSI, with an arrowhead pointing to the selected course, and a movable center bar indicating course deviation against a scale of two dots to either side of the center. A TO/FROM indication is shown as a triangle above (TO) or below (FROM) the ends of the CDI.
The ARC Compass Mode has two different CDI formats -ARC HSI Mode and ARC CDI Mode.
The ARC HSI Mode, presents a full rotating Course Pointer with a CDI, which resembles that used in the HSI in the 360° Compass Mode. The ARC CDI Mode presents a short Course
Pointer stub on the compass arc and a fixed CDI at the bottom of the display, similar to the
LDI and resembling that used in contemporary GPS navigation displays. The ARC CDI Mode allows more open space for flight plan and basemap details. A TO indication is shown to the left of the fixed CDI, and a FROM indication is shown to its right.
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-35
Page 2-34
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
2.3.4.4. Deviation Off-Scale Indication
1
Whenever the course deviation exceeds the maximum displayable range of 2.5 dots, the CDI or deviation diamond is shown as a hollow, ghosted image pegged to the corresponding side (
Figure 2-41
and
Figure 2-42
). As soon as the CDI or deviation diamond comes into range, it turns solid green, making it easy to identify when the indicator is “alive”.
2.3.4.5. Auto Course Select
1
When a GPS is selected as the CDI’s navigation source, the default setting of the
EFD1000 Pro PFD is Auto Course Select. When Auto Course Select is enabled, the
GPS will automatically set the Course Pointer to the current GPS course (CRS) value whenever the GPS sequences between waypoints. This capability relieves the pilot from having to manually set the course at each waypoint along a GPS route. When Auto
Course Select is enabled, the pilot cannot adjust the CRS value.
Auto Course Select is indicated by an inverse A on a green background, adjacent to both the numerical CRS value and the CRS Left Knob State. (
Figure 2-43
and
Figure 2-44
).
If the GPS navigator enters the OBS or HOLD mode, Auto Course Select is automatically disabled on the EFD1000 Pro PFD until the GPS navigator resumes waypoint sequencing. The pilot can disable Auto Course Select from Page 1 of the Menu.
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 2-41
Off Scale CDI Bar
Figure 2-42
Off Scale Deviation Diamond, ARC CDI Mode
Figure 2-43
Auto Course Indication on CRS Field
Figure 2-44
Auto Course Indication over Left Knob
Page 2-35
Figure 2-45
BRG#1 Set to GPS1 TAKLE (Single Line Bearing Pointer)
Page 2-36
2.3.4.6. Bearing Pointers
1
The Single- (
Figure 2-2, No. 58
) or Double-line (
Figure 2-2, No. 61
) Bearing Pointers can be overlaid on the HSI (
Figure 2-45
). Use the Left and Right buttons (
Figure 2-2,
No. 12
and
No. 10
) to select the navigation sources for the Bearing Pointers, or select none (blank) to remove a Bearing Pointer from the display.
Bearing Pointers always point to a VOR or waypoint. When coupled to a VOR source, the tail of the Bearing Pointer indicates the VOR radial on which the aircraft is currently located. Bearing Pointers are excellent tools for identifying crossing radials, flying DME arcs, and improving situational awareness.
Bearing Pointers are only available in the 360° Compass Mode. Any available navigation source may be coupled to either Bearing Pointer. If coupled to a source that does not provide angular bearing data, such as a localizer, the Bearing Pointer is not shown, and the Bearing Pointer Source is slashed as invalid.
Each Bearing Pointer has an associated Source Information Block that displays information about the source of the Bearing Pointer data. This may include distance to station (if coupled to a GPS waypoint) and the tuned frequency for a VOR. This information is only presented when it is reported to the Pro PFD by the connected equipment.
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 2-37
Page 2-36
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
2.3.4.7. Rate of Turn Indicator
A Rate of Turn Indicator (
Figure 2-2, No. 48
) with a range of 0 to 6 degrees per second is provided for both the 360 and ARC Compass Modes. The indicator consists of a curved white tape that extends from the Numerical Heading Indicator’s lubber line and in the direction of the turn, along the outer curve of the compass card.
The Rate of Turn Indicator features an outer thick white tick mark for a Standard Rate turn, and an inner thin white tick mark for Half-Standard Rate turns. A Standard Rate, two-minute turn equals 3 degrees per second. When the rate of turn exceeds 6 degrees per second, an arrowhead is added to the end of the tape to show that the rate of turn has exceeded the limits of the indicator (
Figure 2-46
).
2.3.4.8. Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
Whenever the vertical speed exceeds +/- 100 feet per minute (fpm), the vertical speed is indicated by a rising/sinking white vertical tape and associated scale markers immediately to the right of the compass rose (
Figure 2-2, No. 57
and
Figure 2-47
).
A numerical value of the aircraft’s vertical speed is shown directly above the tape, in the upper right-hand corner of the Navigation Display (
Figure 2-2, No. 56
). Rates of up to ±2,000 fpm are indicated by the tape, while the numerical value will display rates of up to ±9,990 fpm. A white triangle caps the tape whenever rates exceed ±2,000 fpm
(
Figure 2-48
). The Vertical Speed Numerical Value will be dashed whenever the vertical speed exceeds +/- 10,000 fpm. In the ARC Compass Mode, only the Vertical Speed
Numerical Value is presented.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 2-46
Rate of Turn Indicator, Rate Shown >6º/second
Figure 2-47
VSI Tape Showing 370 fpm Descent
Figure 2-48
VSI Tape Capped, Digital Value
Showing 2,100 FPM Climb
Page 2-37
Page 2-38
Figure 2-49
Map in ARC Compass Mode,
20nm Range at Declutter Level 3
Figure 2-50
Declutter Level 4
Figure 2-51
Declutter Level 3
Figure 2-52
Declutter Level 2
Figure 2-53
Declutter Level 1
Figure 2-54
Declutter Level 0 (Off)
2.3.4.9. Situational Awareness Map
When the PFD is connected to a compatible GPS navigator, basemap symbols can be displayed underneath the Direction Indicator in either 360º or ARC Compass Modes.
Most GPS navigators output data for the PFD to display the GPS flight plan legs and waypoints. The active GPS flight plan leg, waypoint, and its identifier are shown in magenta. Other waypoints and legs are shown in white.
Some GPS navigators (typically those using the ARINC 429 data protocol, such as the Garmin 400/500 series) output basemap data (e.g., airports, VORs, NDBs, and intersections). Often, these GPS navigators also display curved flight paths, such as arcs, course reversals, and holding patterns.
The basemap is always oriented with magnetic North heading up and centered so that the current aircraft position coincides with the aircraft ownship symbol. These basemap symbols underlay all other instruments and annunciations in the Navigation Display.
The Map Declutter Settings can be found in the 360 or ARC MAP SETTINGS page of the Menu. Pressing the desired 360 or ARC DCLTR LVL Menu Key and rotating the Right
Knob will select Declutter Levels 4, 3, 2, 1, or OFF (
Figure 2-50, 2-51, 2-52, 2-53, 2-54
).
The map display range is controlled by the RNG Button (
Figure 2-2, Ref. 2
), enabling the pilot to zoom in or out on the map. Automatic declutter logic changes the map features displayed depending on the selected map range.
The current range and declutter level map settings are shown in the lower left-hand corner of the navigation display (
Figure 2-49
). The map range is displayed in nautical miles, measuring the distance from the ownship symbol to the outside edge of the compass rose. The map declutter level is indicated by one to four green parallelograms below the range value. More parallelograms indicate that more basemap features are displayed.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page PB
Page PB
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Chapter 3
Flying the Pro PFD
This chapter provides an overview of flying the Pro PFD on an IFR crosscountry flight, explaining how to access and change the necessary settings of the PFD. Refer to
Chapter 4
for detailed step-by-step instructions for all PFD functionality.
While you can jump right in to using the PFD with this chapter, it may be helpful to first read
Chapter 2
to become more familiar with the controls, operating logic, and display elements of the PFD.
The PFD is a powerful Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS), offering the same capabilities and features found in larger glass cockpit systems in airliners, business jets, and newer general aviation aircraft. It is capable of far more than the analog instruments it typically replaces. It will take some time and experience to master all of its advanced capabilities, especially if this is your first exposure to flying an EFIS and a glass cockpit. Nonetheless, in its most basic configuration, the PFD will look immediately familiar to anyone accustomed to flying mechanical instruments, and its basic operation is very similar and intuitive.
Before flying your new PFD on an actual IFR flight, first be sure to spend some time with your installer to understand exactly how your aircraft is configured. It’s also recommended to get some dual instruction and practice in VFR conditions until you are comfortable with how the PFD performs and integrates with the other avionics in your airplane.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 3-1
Page 3-2
Figure 3-1
Basic PFD Settings
FEATURE
Selected
Altitude
Map RNG
(Range)
Buttons
Barometric
Pressure
Setting Field
SETTING
Set as desired
Set as desired on/off
Heading Bug
Value
Set as desired
Compass
Mode Hot Key:
360 or ARC
GPS Steering
(GPSS) Hot
Key
1
Table 3-1 Basic PFD Settings
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Set as desired on/off
FEATURE
Barometric
Pressure
(BARO) Hot
Key
Left and Right
Buttons,
Bearing
Pointers Nav
Source
1
CDI
Navigation
Source Select
(Middle
Button)
1
Selected
Course (CRS)
Pointer Field
1
SETTING
Allows for BARO adjustment
Select as desired
Select as desired
Set as desired
MINIMUMS
Setting
1
Set approach minimums
Selected
Airspeed
Set as desired
091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 3-3
Page 3-2
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
3.1. Quick Controls Overview
Chapter 2
explains the PFD controls in detail. The following is a quick summary:
Knobs
(
See
Chapter 2, Section 2.2.1.
for details)
The Left or Right Knob each has a Home State, to which it returns after 10 seconds of inactivity. The Left Knob is the CRS Knob, and the Right Knob is the HDG Knob.
• The current function of each knob is shown by its State, displayed immediately above the knob. If the knob state is shown in magenta, turning the knob will change the value of the function shown. If the legend is shown in cyan or green, turning the knob will have no effect.
• From the Home State, pressing the knob once will enable the current function to be set (Knob State color changes from cyan to magenta).
Successive presses of the knob will cycle through the functions that knob can control. When the function you want to change is shown in magenta, turning the knob will change its value.
• The Left Knob sets the Course Pointer (CRS, except when Auto Course Select is enabled) and Indicated Airspeed Bug (IAS).
• The Right Knob sets Heading (HDG), Selected Altitude (ALT), Barometric
Pressure Setting (BARO), and Approach Minimums (MIN).
• Pressing and holding a knob syncs the selected function.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 3-3
Page 3-4
Navigation Source Buttons
• Three Buttons at the bottom of the display couple the available navigation sources to the CDI and the Bearing Pointers.
• The Center Button - CDI Navigation Source Select Button (
Figure 2-2, Ref.
11
) selects the nav source to couple to the CDI and to drive the autopilot (if installed).
• The Left Button and Right Button (
Figure 2-2, Refs. 12 and 10
) select which nav source couples to each of the two Bearing Pointers or none to hide the bearing pointers (
see
Chapter 2, Section 2.2.2
for details)
Hot Keys
• The five keys on the lower right-hand side of the display are Hot Keys, the function of which is shown by the legend on the screen immediately adjacent to each key.
• The current status of each Hot Key is shown by the legend in a green label and dark blue letters if active or in a blue label and green letters if inactive.
• Each press of a Hot Key will either toggle its function on or off, or will cycle among available settings (
see
Chapter 2, Section 2.2.3
for details).
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 3-5
Page 3-4
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
3.2. Example Flight Scenario
This section will walk you through using the Pro PFD on an IFR flight from Albuquerque
International Sunport (KABQ) to Reno/Tahoe International Airport (KRNO), flying Victor airways to the ILS16R approach into KRNO. This scenario uses one pilot’s technique for setting up the navigation instruments, but there are many other valid possibilities. Use whatever techniques work best for you.
Our aircraft for this example flight scenario is a Beechcraft Baron P58TC, equipped with dual Garmin GNS-430W WAAS GPS/Nav/Comm and the Bendix/King KFC-200 Autopilot.
The Pro PFD is configured with Auto Course Select enabled, BARO setting in inches Hg,
Vspeed text markers displayed, ARC compass mode in CDI, and Basemap configured with its default settings.
The Garmin 430Ws are configured with ILS CDI Capture set to AUTO, meaning that when an ILS approach is loaded and active in the GPS, and the aircraft is established inbound to the FAF, the 430W will automatically switch its CDI output from GPS to the
VHF localizer frequency. The PFD will follow this switch on its CDI Navigation Source
Select, automatically changing from GPS1 to VLOC1.
NOTE
The tasks and procedures you will use in your airplane will vary depending on your aircraft and equipment, and on how they are configured and integrated with the PFD in your specific installation
091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 3-5
Figure 3-2
EFD1000 PFD Initializing
Figure 3-3
CDI Navigation Source Slashed Invalid
Page 3-6
3.2.1. Pre-Departure (Startup)
Once the pre-flight inspections and checklists are complete, start the engines and turn on the PFD Master switch.
When power is applied to the PFD, the bezel backlighting illuminates and within a few seconds the PFD splash screen displays while it initializes and the AHRS data is validated
(
Figure 3-2
).
As the software initializes and the PFD warms up, the Attitude and Navigation Displays will appear first (typically within 20-30 seconds), with red X’s showing for the airspeed and altitude tapes and the CDI Navigation Source is slashed as invalid (
Figure 3-3
).
Depending on how cold the aircraft is, the air data sensors will quickly warm to operating temperature, and the airspeed and altitude tapes will appear. At this point, the red X’s will disappear and, the PFD is ready.
NOTE
Start-up times for the PFD are highly dependent on aircraft temperature. In extremely cold weather, when the aircraft has been cold soaked, it may take several minutes (usually no more than five) for the PFD to be fully operational. On the second or third flight of the day, and/or on very hot days, the PFD may initialize within 30 seconds or less.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 3-7
Page 3-6
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Turn the Avionics Master ON. Until the navigation radios are operational, the CDI
Navigation Source annunciations on the PFD is slashed as invalid (
Figure 3-4
), and the GPS1, GPS2 caution annunciations on the left (
Figure 3-5
), and INTEG caution annunciated on the right edge of the display. The CDI Navigation Source Select will default to VLOC1 the first time the PFD is turned on. After that the CDI Navigation
Source Select will display the last used CDI Source. Once the nav radios have warmed up, the red line will be removed from the CDI Navigation Source annunciation.
NOTE
GPS navigators will not output valid navigation information until programmed with an active flight plan or direct-to waypoint, and thus will be treated as invalid by the
PFD and cannot be selected as a CDI or Bearing Pointer navigation source until they are programmed with an active waypoint.
When the PFD is interfaced to a Garmin 4xx /5xx or 4xx(W)/5xx(W) navigator, and the navigator’s Instrument Panel Self-Test page is displayed, the indicated lateral deviation can be verified on the Pro PFD CDI. This confirms that a valid digital signal has been received from the Garmin system.
The interface between the Garmin 4xx/5xx and EFD1000 system should be considered fully operational once the presence of the digital signal is confirmed. If there is no
GPS failure annunciation on the PFD the lateral deviation indication on the PFD HSI correlates to the indication on the Garmin 4xx/5xx Instrument Panel Self-Test Page, and then the digital signal is confirmed, and the interface is operational.
Figure 3-4
CDI Source Slashed Invalid
Figure 3-5
GPS Caution Annunciations
NOTE
The graphics used in this chapter illustrate the descriptions of the features and tasks, but do not necessarily correspond to the values associated with this example flight scenario.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 3-7
WARNING
Whenever there is a new altimeter setting, set both the
PFD and the standby altimeter.
The navigator’s indicated lateral and vertical deviations cannot be compared to the
EFD1000’s Lateral Deviation Indicator (LDI) and Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) because the 4xx/5xx Instrument Panel Self-Test Page does not send an Approach Mode signal to the EFD1000 Pro PFD..
Once the radios are available, we listen to the ATIS and learn that the local altimeter setting is 30.15 and that Runway 8 is in use for departures.
First set the standby altimeter to 30.15, and then set the PFD barometric pressure setting.
Set the Barometric Pressure
1. Press the BARO Hot Key. The BARO label above the Right Knob and Barometric
Pressure Setting Field appear in magenta - enabled for editing (
Figure 3-6
).
2. Rotate the Right Knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the value of the Barometric Pressure Setting Field.
3. Once the correct value is selected, press the BARO Hot Key or any knob, button/key to exit the BARO function. After 10 seconds of inaction or if any other button/key is pressed, the BARO function is disabled and the Right
Knob returns to normal operation (
Figure 3-7
).
Figure 3-6
BARO Setting Field Enabled
Figure 3-7
BARO Setting Field Disabled
Page 3-8
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 3-9
Page 3-8
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Next, since we’ll be departing from Runway 8, we set our Heading Bug to runway heading, 080°.
Set the Heading Bug
1. Press the Right Knob until HDG displays above the knob and the HDG field is enabled for editing, both rendered in magenta (
Figure 3-8
). The Heading
Bug will also be rendered in magenta, and a dashed magenta line will extend from the ownship symbol to the Heading Bug to make it easier to see the bug position.
2. Rotate the Right Knob to change the value of the Selected Heading field.
Rotate clockwise to increase, or counterclockwise to decrease, the value.
Once the correct heading is selected and after 10 seconds of inaction, the field is disabled, and the label and field are rendered in cyan (
Figure 3-9
).
We call Clearance Delivery to pick up our IFR clearance. It is:
Baron N1234 is cleared to the Reno/Tahoe Airport via the LARGO2 departure,
Zuni (ZUN) transition, then as filed; Maintain 7,000; Expect 10,000 in five minutes;
Departure frequency is 127.4; Squawk 0123.
We copy and read back our clearance, and then set up our avionics for an instrument departure. We set our transponder code and comm radio frequencies. Then we enter our flight plan into GPS1, load the LARGO2 departure, crossfill into GPS2, and activate the flight plan. We make sure the CDI button on the 430W is set to GPS.
The LARGO2 departure calls for vectors to our route. From past experience, we expect to be vectored past ABQ VOR, and then given a vector to join the departure on the
ABQ-to-ZUN leg (a 255º course). While we navigate with GPS, for situational awareness, we tune those first two VOR fixes into our nav radios. We tune the ABQ VOR (113.2) into
VLOC1 and the ZUN VOR (113.4) into VLOC2.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 3-8
Selected Heading Field Enabled
Figure 3-9
Selected Heading Field Disabled
Page 3-9
Figure 3-10
CDI Navigation Source Selection Button
Figure 3-11
Bearing Pointer Nav Source Select Buttons
NOTE
When no source is selected, only the Bearing Pointer icon is shown above the applicable button (
Figure
3-12
).
Select GPS1 as the CDI Navigation Source. Because we have enabled Auto Course
Select, the Course Pointer automatically slews to 261º (the initial course from the airport to the first fix on the LARGO2 departure, ABQ VOR).
Select the CDI Navigation Source
• Press the CDI Navigation Source Select Button (
Figure 3-10
) until the desired navigation source is shown above the Button (in this case, GPS1).
For a traditional RMI view, we could use our two Bearing Pointers to monitor our passing the ABQ VOR and then intercepting the course to ZUN. We’d use the left,
Single-Line Bearing Pointer Source Select Button to select VOR1 (ABQ), and use the right
Double-Line Bearing Pointer Source Select Button to select VOR2 (ZUN). Since the ZUN
VOR is too far away to receive on the ground at Albuquerque, VLOC2 will be shown with a red line through it above the Double Bearing Pointer Source Select Button, and the
Double-Line Bearing Pointer will not be displayed. But we know that the station will be received, and the pointer will be shown, by the time we climb to our initial cruise altitude.
Select Bearing Pointer Nav Sources
• Press the Left Button (Single-Line Bearing Pointer) or the Right Button
(Double-Line Bearing Pointer) until the desired navigation source is shown above the Button (
Figure 3-11
).
For even better situational awareness, we choose to display the map of our flight plan legs and waypoints. We press the MAP Hot Key to bring up the Basemap. We use the
Range Control Buttons to select the 20nm range, which will give a good perspective for intercepting the course to ZUN. Our initial flight plan leg, from the airport to the ABQ
VOR, is shown in magenta, with subsequent legs and waypoints shown in white.
Figure 3-12
No Bearing Pointer Sources Selected
Page 3-10
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 3-11
Page 3-10
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Select Map Declutter Level
The Map Declutter function can be found in the 360 MAP SETTINGS page or in the ARC
MAP SETTINGS page of the MENU (
Figure 3-13
). The Map Declutter Icon is located on the bottom left of the Nav Display (
Figure 3-13a
) The Declutter settings can be configured to Levels 4, 3, 2, 1, or 0 (
Figures 3-13b thru 3-13f
) (
see
Chapter 5, Table 5-9
for more details).
To change the Map Declutter Level
1. Press the MENU Button and rotate the Right Knob to the 360 MAP SETTINGS or the ARC MAP SETTINGS page.
2. Press the DCLTR LVL Menu Key and rotate the Right Knob to select the desired declutter level, then press MENU Button to exit.
NOTE
The Basemap symbols and flight plan legs rendered for each of the map’s declutter levels (4, 3, 2, 1, or 0) are based on the selected map range. These are manually configured to display or not in the Main Menu. Detailed information is provided in
Chapter 5, Section 5.2
.
Figure 3-13b
Declutter Level 4
091-00005-001 REV F
Figure 3-13
Changing the Map Declutter Level
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 3-13a
Map Declutter Icon Location
Figure 3-13c
Declutter Level 3
Figure 3-13d
Declutter Level 2
Figure 3-13e
Declutter Level 1
Figure 3-13f
Declutter Level 0
Page 3-11
Current Range
Figure 3-14
Range Button
Change the Map Range
• Press the RNG (Range) Buttons (
Figure 3-14
) UP (+) to increase the range, or DOWN (-) to decrease the range, until the desired range is shown
(
Figures 3-15
and
3-16
).
Ownship
Symbol
Page 3-12
Figure 3-15
Current Range 20nm from Ownship to Edge of Compass Rose
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 3-16
Current Range 10nm from Ownship to Edge of Compass Rose
091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 3-13
Page 3-12
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Aspen’s Evolution Hazard Awareness (EHA) 1 option allows the EWR50 XM WX Data Link
Weather Receiver, WX500 Stormscope®, and Traffic system to be connected to the Pro
PFD. These options enable weather and traffic hazards to be overlaid on the Navigation
Display.
Our pre-flight weather briefing noted a line of thunderstorms west and south of
Albuquerque, moving northeast at 15 knots. Our flight plan route should keep us clear of the weather, but we want to check the latest NEXRAD images before departure just to be sure. So we zoom the map out to its farthest range and turn on the Data Link NEXRAD
Precipitation and Lightning overlays to see how things look along our route of flight. (In flight, we’ll also use our WX500 Stormscope® for real-time lightning detection, but on the ground, Data Link Lightning will give us a better indication of where the thunderstorms are located).
Display the Data Link Weather
1. Display the 2/2 Hot Key Menu.
2. Press the NXRD Hot Key to turn Data Link Weather on (label turns inverse green
Figure 3-17
).
Display the Lightning Overlay
1. Display the 2/2 Hot Key Menu.
2. Press the LTNG Hot Key until the desired overlay is selected (LTNG, STRK, or
CELL).
Figure 3-18
shows STRK selected.
We see the storms are still moving about as forecast and that our planned route still looks like it will keep us well clear. We leave the Weather overlays turned on so we can monitor them in-flight, and then zoom the map back to the 20nm range for departure.
1. When the PFD is configured with an ADS-B radio refer to Aspen document 091-00057-001, ADS-B Pilot’s Guide Supplement..
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 3-17
Data Link Weather Overlay On
Figure 3-18
Lightning Overlay On Displaying WX-500 Strike Data
Page 3-13
Figure 3-19
Traffic Overlay On
(Traffic Normal selected)
Page 3-14
Since the Albuquerque area is sometimes busy with VFR traffic, turn on the Traffic overlay.
Display the Traffic Overlay
1. Display the 2/2 Hot Key Menu.
2. Press the TRFC Hot Key to select the desired Altitude Filter. The label turns inverse green for TFCN (Normal), TFCU (Unrestricted), TFCA (Above), and
TFCB (Below). The TFRC annunciation displays in the lower left of the display
(
Figure 3-19
).
3. Press the 1/2 Hot Key Menu for access to GPSS for departure.
Altitude Alerter
Next, we set our assigned initial altitude of 7,000 feet in the Selected Altitude Field which enables the Altitude Alerter. We press the Right Knob twice, changing the legend above the knob to ALT in magenta. Then we turn the Right Knob to set 7,000. This will help us capture and maintain our assigned altitude.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 3-15
Page 3-14
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
NOTE
Setting the Altitude Alerter provides visual and aural cues to help the pilot capture and maintain target altitudes. When set to a new altitude, the Alerter will illuminate a yellow flag adjacent to the target altitude display and sound a one-second tone; 15 seconds (or
200 feet) before the aircraft will reach the target altitude (based on current rate of climb or descent). The yellow flag will extinguish once the target is reached. Subsequently, if the aircraft deviates more than 200 feet above or below the target altitude, the flag will again illuminate, and another one-second tone will sound to alert the pilot to the deviation.
Set the Altitude Alerter
1. Press the Right Knob until ALT displays above the Right Knob and the
Selected Altitude numerical field and Bug are enabled for editing, all three rendered in magenta (
Figures 3-20 and 3-21
).
2. Rotate the Right Knob to change the value of the Selected Altitude field.
Rotate clockwise to increase, or counterclockwise to decrease, the value.
3. Once the correct value is selected, and after 10 seconds of inaction, the field is disabled and the label, Selected Altitude field, and Bug are rendered in cyan
(
Figure 3-22
).
Figure 3-20
Altitude Bug Enabled
Figure 3-21
Altitude Field Enabled
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 3-22
Altitude Bug Disabled
NOTE
Synchronizing the altitude sets the selected altitude to the current altitude (see
Chapter 2, Section 2.2.1.3.
)
Page 3-15
Figure 3-23
Selected Airspeed Field Enabled
Figure 3-24
Selected Airspeed Field Enabled
Figure 3-25
Selected Airspeed Field Disabled
NOTE
Synchronizing the airspeed sets the selected airspeed to the current airspeed (see
Chapter 2, Section 2.2.1.3.
)
Our normal climb speed is 120 KIAS, so we set the Airspeed Bug as a reminder. To do so, we press the Left Knob twice, until it shows IAS in magenta above the knob. Then turn the knob until 120 shows in the Selected Airspeed Field.
Set the Airspeed Bug
1. Press the Left Knob until IAS displays above the Left Knob and the Selected
Airspeed field and bug are enabled for editing, all three rendered in magenta
(
Figures 3-23 and 3-24
).
2. Rotate the Left Knob to change the value of the Selected Airspeed field.
Rotate clockwise to increase, or counterclockwise to decrease, the value.
3. Once the correct value is selected, and after 10 seconds of inaction, the field is disabled, and the label and field are rendered in cyan (
Figure 3-25
).
We plan to hand-fly the plane until reaching our final enroute altitude of 10,000 feet, but would like to use the Flight Director (FD) (
Figure 3-26
). So, as part of our Before
Takeoff set-up, we press the FD button on the autopilot mode selector, and the magenta V-bars display on the PFD. As an easy way to give us guidance on the takeoff, we press the Go Around button. This commands wings level and about a 10º pitch-up attitude, which works well for our initial climb.
Now our avionics are all set, so we taxi out to the runway, do our run-up, and call tower, ready for departure. As we taxi into position and hold on Runway 8, we verify that our
PFD compass shows 080º, lined-up with our pre-set Heading Bug. As tower clears us for takeoff, it tells us to wait until reaching the end of the runway, and then to turn left to heading 250º. Rotate the Right Knob to set the Heading Bug to 250°.
Page 3-16
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 3-17
Page 3-16
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
3.2.2. Departure
As we start the takeoff roll, we note the airspeed on the PFD comes “alive” at 20 KIAS. All indications are normal, so we continue the takeoff, rotate at 80 KIAS and fly the Flight
Director command bars at 10º pitch up with wings level. As we run out of usable runway to land, we bring the gear up, and soon we’re over the end of the 13,800 ft. runway.
We engage HDG mode on the autopilot mode selector, and the FD commands a left turn to our assigned 250º heading, which we have already set with the Heading Bug.
Through 1,000 feet AGL, we power back and adjust the pitch attitude to maintain our target 120 KIAS climb speed, as shown by the Airspeed Bug on the airspeed tape, and set the FD pitch to that attitude.
Soon we hear a one-second tone and see the yellow flag appear next to our Selected
Altitude field at the top of the PFD airspeed tape (
Figure 3-27
). This means we are
15 seconds away from reaching our assigned altitude. We begin to shallow our climb, and level off at 7,000 feet, engaging ALT hold on the AP/FD mode selector. The yellow
Altitude Alert on the PFD goes out as we capture and hold our altitude.
While on the 250º vector, we pass abeam the ABQ VOR. The Single-Line Bearing Pointer points abeam, toward the VOR, and then swings behind the aircraft. We also notice that the GPS then sequences to the next flight plan waypoint, the ZUN VOR.. The PFD Course
Pointer automatically swings left to the new course, 255º, and the leg on our Basemap turns magenta.
Albuquerque Departure now tells us to fly heading 220º to join the LARGO2 departure, and climb and maintain 10,000. Departure also calls out slower traffic at our 10 o’clock, seven miles, west-bound at 8,000, and asks us to expedite our climb through 8,000.
1. Rotate the Right Knob and turn it left to set the Heading Bug to 220º.
2. Press the Right Knob twice to activate ALT, and turn it right to set 10,000 in the
Selected Altitude field at the top of the Altitude Tape.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 3-26
Flight Director V-bars
Figure 3-27
Altitude Alerter Flag Illuminated
Page 3-17
Figure 3-28
CDI Shown Hollow at Full-Scale Deflection
Figure 3-29
CDI “Alive” and Shown Solid
Page 3-18
Auto Course Select has already set our Course Pointer to the 255º course from ABQ to
ZUN on the LARGO2 departure, and a 220º heading sets us up for a nice intercept. We disengage ALT hold on the autopilot, set our cruise climb attitude and power,, set the
V-bars to that pitch, and initiate the climb from 7,000 to 10,000 feet. We pitch a little higher to climb at 115 KIAS through 8,000 for traffic, then lower the nose to maintain our target airspeed of 120 KIAS by reference to the Airspeed Bug.
Even though our traffic should be right ahead of us and about five miles by now, we don’t see it out the window. But we see the traffic target on our PFD Navigation Display and continue to monitor it even though it appears not to be a factor.
At about 9,700 feet, the Altitude Alerter tone sounds, and the yellow alert flag by the
Selected Altitude field illuminates, telling us we are 15 seconds from reaching our assigned 10,000 feet. We begin our level-off, and upon reaching 10,000 feet, engage ALT hold on the autopilot’s mode selector.
Departure calls again to hand us off to Albuquerque Center on 133.0. As we’re tuning the radio, we hear an alert tone. A glance at the PFD shows the Altitude Alerter flag flashing, our altitude indicates 10,200 and climbing, and our Flight Director V-bars are commanding pitch down. We quickly stop the climb, correct back down to our assigned altitude of 10,000, and engage the autopilot before calling to check in with Center.
As we level out, accelerate to cruise speed, and then power back, we finally see our traffic out the left window, same direction, now about two miles and 2,000 feet below us — just where the traffic symbol on our PFD says it should be.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 3-19
Page 3-18
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
3.2.3. Enroute
Albuquerque Center gives us a new altimeter setting of 30.11. We set 30.11 on the standby altimeter and then on the PFD.
• Press the BARO Hot Key and rotate the Right Knob to set 30.11.
• Press the BARO Hot Key, or any knob, button/key to exit.
Soon, the CDI comes “alive” and attracts our attention as it changes from hollow (
Figure
3-28
) to solid green (
Figure 3-29
) and begins to move in towards the Course Pointer as we intercept our course. We enable GPSS to complete the intercept and steer us along the airways all the way to Reno, and engage the autopilot.
Engage GPSS
1. Press the GPSS Hot Key to Enable GPS Steering (
Figure 3-30
).
2. Verify indications that GPSS is now enabled on the PFD.
• The GPSS legend adjacent to the GPSS Hot Key should be shown in inverse green.
• The annunciation GPSS1 (or GPSS2, depending on the selected CDI
Navigation Source), along with an inverse A, should be shown next to the HDG reference at the top of the navigation display (
Figure 3-31
).
3. Select HDG mode on the autopilot’s mode selector.
• The Flight Director V-bars should be showing appropriate steering cues to intercept and track the course.
4. Engage the autopilot (if desired).
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 3-30
GPSS Enabled legend in Green
Figure 3-31
GPSS Enabled
Page 3-19
Figure 3-32
360° Compass Mode
Figure 3-33
ARC CDI Compass Mode
NOTE
Each HSI Compass Mode (360 and ARC) retains its own
Range and Map declutter settings when switching between the two.
With GPS Steering (GPSS), a compatible GPS navigator (in this case, a Garmin 430W) drives the autopilot directly via the autopilot’s HDG mode, telling it how to bank to stay centered on course. GPSS can drive the autopilot far more accurately than the NAV mode (which is based on course deviation indications) because the GPS always knows the ground track and how to adjust to maintain that track, implicitly accounting for changing wind conditions. The GPS also includes turn anticipation based on current ground speed and track, enabling it to turn early and roll out centered on the new course without overshooting. As we’ll soon see when flying an instrument approach, an autopilot with a WAAS GPS and GPSS enabled can even fly procedure turns and holding patterns. For more detail on GPSS
(see
Chapter 4, Section 4.7.1.
)
.
Now that we’re established at our final cruise altitude and in the enroute phase of our flight, we’ll switch to the ARC Compass mode of the HSI to maximize a forward view.
1. Press the 360 Hot Key and observe that HSI changes to its ARC Compass mode and the Hot Key label changes from 360 to ARC.
2. Press the RNG Buttons to adjust the map range to suit your preference.
Select a Compass Mode
• Press the 360/ARC Hot Key to alternately select either the 360° (
Figure 3-32
) or the ARC (
Figure 3-33
) Compass Mode.
We set cruise power and lean the mixture. As the airplane stabilizes in cruise, we check the Data Bar to monitor performance. True Airspeed (TAS) is close to book performance for this altitude and power setting. OAT is close to ISA. Winds aloft are close to forecast, about a 30º left quartering headwind at 15 knots, so we’ll expect to gain some ground speed due to a stronger tailwind component when we turn northwest toward Reno.
Page 3-20
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 3-21
Page 3-20
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Check TAS, GS, and winds and temperature aloft on the Data Bar (
Figure 3-34
).
Ahead, we can see out the window some threatening convective buildups, those that were mentioned in our weather briefing and which we checked using Data Link
Weather on the ground in Albuquerque. We still have the NEXRAD precipitation (NXRD) and Data Link Lightning (LTNG) overlays selected, and the PFD Nav Display shows the weather clearly ahead of us. For a more real-time look at lightning activity in the buildup, we switch to our WX500 Stormscope® and see lots of strikes appearing as we also see the lightning flashes out the window.
Display the Lightning Overlay
1. Display the 2/2 Hot Key Menu.
2. Press the LTNG Hot Key until the STRK label is shown in green next to the Hot
Key (
Figure 3-35
).
3. The STRK mode annunciation appears in the lower left-hand corner of the
Navigation Display, showing a yellow X for Strike mode, and a strike rate of 6
(moderate lightning activity) (
Figure 3-36
).
Fortunately, the Nav Display shows our flight plan will make a right turn at Winslow
(INW) and a another right turn at Flagstaff (FLG), which will keep us clear of the weather.
Continuing enroute, we monitor progress along our flight plan on the extended forward view of ARC mode, watching as GPSS keeps us exactly centered on course through several turns on the airways.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 3-34
Data Bar
Figure 3-35
Lightning Overlay On Displaying WX-500 Strike Data
Figure 3-36
WX-500 Strike Rate Annunciation
Page 3-21
Figure 3-37
MIN Hot Key (shown disabled)
Page 3-22
Figure 3-38
MIN Display Selected for Editing
3.2.4. Arrival and Approach to Landing
As we near Reno, we prepare for our arrival. Within range, we pick up the ATIS:
Reno-Tahoe International Airport, Information Romeo, 2253 Zulu. Winds 180 at
17. Ceiling 1,400 broken. Temperature 23, dewpoint 18, altimeter 30.08. ILS16R approach in use. Advise on initial contact you have Information Romeo.
Our route along V105 brings us to the Mustang VOR (FMG), which has a published transition to TAKLE, an Initial Approach Fix (IAF) for the ILS RWY 16R instrument approach procedure. Because we’d like some practice with our new PFD and GPSS, we’ll ask to fly the full procedure with pilot nav.
We load the KRNO ILS16R approach into the GPS, selecting TAKLE as our IAF and the
ILS frequency (110.9) is placed in the standby window of the 430W. With Auto Course
Select enabled on the PFD, the HSI Course Pointer will be slewed automatically once we turn inbound to the Final Approach Course of 164º. Briefing the approach, we load the Ground and Tower frequencies into our #2 comm and note our Decision Height is
6,446 feet. We set our approach MINIMUMS on the PFD to 6,450 feet (MINIMUMS are set in increments of 10 feet, so we round up), and we set our Selected Airspeed for the approach at 120 KIAS.
1. Press the MIN Hot Key (
Figure 3-37
).
The Selected Minimums Field appears on the lower right-hand corner of the Attitude Display and the Right Knob State changes from HDG to MIN in magenta, ready for setting (
Figure 3-38
).
2. Turn the Right Knob to set 6,450 on the Selected Minimums Field.
3. Press the Left Knob twice to select IAS for editing.
4. Turn the Left Knob to set 120 kt as our target airspeed.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 3-23
Page 3-22
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
We’re all set up for the approach. Nearing Mustang VOR (FMG), Oakland Center hands us off to Reno Approach, and we request nav for the ILS16R. Approach gives us the new altimeter setting of 30.08, clears us down to 9,000 feet, and after FMG direct TAKLE. We initiate the descent, set 30.08 in the standby altimeter and on the PFD:
1. Press the Right Knob twice to select ALT for editing.
2. Turn the Right Knob left to set 9,000 as our Selected Altitude.
3. Press the BARO Hot Key to select BARO for editing
4. Turn the Right Knob left to set 30.08 as our barometric pressure setting.
Fifteen seconds before reaching 9,000 feet, the Altitude Alerter flag illuminates, and the alert tone sounds. We begin our level-off and re-engage ALT hold on the autopilot upon reaching 9,000 feet. We leave the autopilot in HDG mode and continue with GPSS enabled on the PFD.
Approaching FMG, the GPS turn anticipation sequences to TAKLE, our Course Pointer swings automatically from 302º to 316º, and GPSS steers us through the turn, rolling out precisely on course. We power back and select the first notch of flaps to slow down. Reno Approach calls, reports us six miles from TAKLE, and clears us for the ILS16R approach.
We activate the approach on the GPS and move the ILS frequency into the active window.
GPSS continues to steer the plane to the initial approach fix, TAKLE, and at TAKLE, turns us outbound on a 344º course for the procedure turn (
Figure 3-39
). We see the procedure turn drawn on the Basemap ahead of us, and watch it turn magenta as the
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 3-39
360º Mode Showing Procedure Turn,
GPSS Enabled
Page 3-23
Page 3-24
GPSS turns and flies the procedure turn for us, with no further pilot action required.
As GPSS completes the procedure turn and rolls out centered on our final approach course of 164º, we begin a descent down to 8,500 feet, which we will maintain until glideslope intercept.
1. Press the Right Knob twice to select ALT for editing.
2. Turn the Right Knob to set 8,500 as our Selected Altitude.
3. On reaching 8,500, re-engage ALT hold on the autopilot.
We are still navigating along the ILS16R approach using GPS, with GPSS driving the autopilot in HDG mode. We know we’ll have to switch the autopilot to APPR mode before glideslope intercept in order for the autopilot to capture the glideslope and fly us down the ILS. But we’ll continue in GPSS and HDG mode a while longer because it tracks the course more accurately with our aging autopilot.
Along this intermediate segment of the approach, watch for the 430W to switch automatically from GPS to VLOC output on its CDI.
• Watch for the EFD1000 CDI Source Select field to change from GPS1 to VLOC1.
This automatic switch from GPS to VLOC should occur 2–10nm outside the Final
Approach Fix (FAF). If it has not occurred automatically by 2nm outside the FAF, manually press the CDI button on the 430W to make the switch to the ILS frequency, and the PFD will follow by switching its Navigation Source Select to VLOC1.
As the PFD navigation source switches to the ILS on VLOC1, the LDI and VDI (
Figure 2-2,
Refs. 36 and 37
) will appear on the Attitude Display.
1. The LDI Navigation Source Annunciation (
Figure 2-2, Ref. 31
) will show ILS, if it is receiving a valid glide slope signal, or LOC, if it is not receiving the glide slope (GS).
2. The CDI Source Information Block (
Figure 2-2, Ref. 65
) will also show ILS or LOC.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 3-25
Page 3-24
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Even though the PFD Navigation Source for the CDI has switched to VLOC1 and the ILS, and the CDI, LDI and VDI are showing deviations relative to the localizer and glideslope, we still have GPSS Enabled with the autopilot in HDG mode. We are not yet flying the
ILS, required for this approach. GPSS is still shown in the inverse green label next to the
GPSS Hot Key, and GPSS1 and an inverse A are still shown at the top of the Navigation
Display where the numerical HDG value is usually shown.
The PFD now permits GPSS to be enabled even when VLOC is selected as the CDI
Navigation Source.
Whenever GPSS is enabled on the PFD, and the autopilot is in HDG mode, the autopilot will fly the GPS flight plan. The autopilot must be switched to APPR mode in order to fly the VLOC source selected for the CDI and to capture and track the glideslope of an ILS, or even an RNAV approach with vertical guidance.
A couple of miles outside the FAF (TAKLE), we switch to APPR mode on the autopilot, which begins to track the localizer and is armed for glideslope capture. At this point, we could disable the GPSS by pressing the GPSS Hot Key to remove potentially confusing annunciations on the PFD, but we know our equipment well. We understand fully that
GPSS is just another form of HDG as far as the autopilot is concerned, and the autopilot will not fly GPSS unless it is in HDG mode. So we leave GPSS enabled on the PFD, planning to use it to fly the Missed Approach if necessary.
With that setup, if we have to fly the Missed Approach, we’ll do so by hitting Go Around mode on the autopilot and climbing straight ahead to 6,700 feet. Then we’ll press the
OBS button on the GPS to allow the missed approach flight plan to sequence. Engage the autopilot in the HDG mode and begin the climb out. With GPSS still enabled, the autopilot will navigate the aircraft directly to the FMG VOR. If the GPS supports curved flight plans, such as a WAAS GPS, the autopilot will automatically enter and fly the hold.
All we have to do is level off when reaching 11,000 feet - and if we had Altitude Pre-
Select on the autopilot, it would even do that for us, too!
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
CAUTION
The Garmin 400/500 series navigators continue to output GPS Steering commands to follow the GPS flight plan even when the CDI source is set to VLOC.
The PFD permits GPSS to be enabled even when VLOC is selected as the CDI navigation source.
Whenever the GPSS is on and the autopilot is in the
HDG mode, the autopilot will fly the GPS flight plan. The autopilot must be switched to APPR mode in order to fly the VLOC source selected on for the CDI and to capture and track the glideslope of an ILS or even an RNAV approach with vertical guidance.
Page 3-25
Page 3-26
Figure 3-40
Vertical and Horizontal Deviation
Indicator, Showing Glide Slope
When the glideslope is full-scale deflection above us, the Deviation Indicator on the
VDI will show as a hollow diamond at the top of the scale (
Figure 3-40
). When the glideslope comes “alive”, the Indicator will change to a solid green diamond and begin to move down the VDI. Just before intercepting the glideslope, we drop the gear and check for three green lights. At glideslope intercept, we verify that the autopilot switches to glideslope-capture and begins to fly the aircraft down the glide slope.
We continue to monitor the approach and verify that the autopilot is tracking both localizer and glide slope. The weather is well above minimums, and we intend to land out of the approach but will let the autopilot fly it down to minimums. As we get close to minimums, a green triangle appears on the Altimeter Tape at 500 feet above minimums; a hollow yellow triangle appears with its tip at 200 feet above minimums and its base at 100 feet above. A red-striped triangle appears at the MINIMUMS setting.
These three color markers on the Altimeter Tape give us visual cues that we are approaching or at minimums.
On reaching the pre-set minimums (6,450 feet):
• The MINIMUMS alert displays below the Aircraft Reference Symbol in the
Attitude Display (
Figure 3-41
).
• The MINIMUMS alert tone sounds three times.
We disconnect the autopilot and hand-fly the plane, continuing to fly the Flight Director and track the glide slope down to a smooth landing.
Figure 3-41
MINIMUMS Alert
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 3-27
3.3.
Conclusion
The Pro PFD is a powerful addition to any cockpit, providing far more capability, information, and automation than the mechanical instruments it typically replaces.
While it is simple and intuitive enough to start using with only a short orientation, fully understanding and exploiting all of its features require some study and experience.
Chapter 4
covers all of the Pro PFD features in detail.
Chapter 5
explains how to customize the PFD to suit your preferences.
Chapter 6
addresses Emergency and Abnormal procedures.
Please read through these chapters to fully understand how to use your PFD.
Page 3-26
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 3-27
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 3-28
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page PB
Chapter 4
Reference Guide
The PFD is a panel-mounted Electronic Flight Instrument System (EFIS) that presents the pilot with displays of attitude, altitude, indicated airspeed, heading, rate of turn, slip/skid, and navigation course deviation information. The system also displays supplemental flight data, such as winds, TAS, OAT, groundspeed, moving maps, pilot-selectable indices
(bugs), and various annunciations to increase situational awareness and enhance flight safety. Moving map situational awareness information is displayed when the unit is connected to compatible GPS equipment.
The PFD system components include the PFD display head, a Remote Sensor Module
(RSM), a Configuration Module (CM), and the optional Analog Converter Unit (ACU).
Chapter 1, Welcome and Introduction
, provides a detailed discussion on the PFD system components.
When interfaced with a compatible autopilot, the Pro PFD system provides heading and course information to the autopilot, which enables the autopilot to follow the
Course and Heading values set by the pilot on the PFD in much the same way as with a mechanical HSI. When interfaced with a compatible GPS, the Pro PFD can provide GPS
Steering (GPSS) to an autopilot.
NOTE
The optional ACU enables the interface of the Pro PFD system with legacy panel-mounted GPS navigators,
VOR/Localizer radios, and autopilots.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 4-1
Page 4-2
4.1. Air Data, Attitude and Heading Reference
System (ADAHRS)
One of the many benefits of glass cockpit systems like the Aspen Evolution system is that they replace old, less-reliable mechanical instruments and sensors with electronic equivalents. For aircraft primary flight instruments, spinning metal gyros are replaced with electronic gyros and accelerometers, and mechanical air data instruments
(airspeed indicator, altimeter, and VSI) are replaced by electronic sensors to measure static and ram air pressures. As we’ve all seen with computers and consumer goods, these modern electronic systems tend to be smaller, faster, cheaper, and more reliable than the older technologies they replace, while also enabling many new, advanced features and capabilities.
An electronic system that replaces the functions of the six primary flight instruments is often called an ADAHRS (Air Data, Attitude, and Heading Reference System). Sometimes, two separate systems work together to deliver those functions: an AHRS for attitude and heading, and an ADC (Air Data Computer) for airspeed, altitude, and vertical speed.
Aspen uses an integrated ADAHRS mounted to the back of the PFD display. While such systems deliver the same basic information to the pilot as the old mechanical instruments, they work in very different ways. It is important that the pilot have at least a basic understanding of how an ADAHRS works to better understand the sorts of failure modes or degraded performance than can occur, how to recognize the symptoms, and what corrective actions the pilot can take.
The PFD uses Micro Electro-Mechanical Systems (MEMS) technology and solid-state accelerometers and magnetometers on all three axes to provide the attitude reference.
Generally, MEMS attitude solutions use multiple sensors and inputs, processed through
Kalman filter software, to derive and validate the attitude solution.
The Aspen system uses more than a dozen different inputs to determine and monitor the aircraft attitude. In this way, the system can validate the derived attitude indication by cross-checking the various inputs to the solution for consistency.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
4.1.1. Attitude
The Aspen ADAHRS attitude solution uses inputs from its internal three-axis accelerometers, rate gyros, and magnetometers, supplemented by ram and static air pressure inputs from the aircraft pitot-static system. Failures or incorrect input from any of these sensors (such as might occur if the pitot tube or static system become blocked) will affect the attitude solution. The PFD is designed to be robust to such failures, either by being tolerant to incorrect inputs, or by detecting and annunciating a degraded attitude solution.
The Aspen ADAHRS includes a Cross-Check Monitor, which predicts the quality of the attitude solution by performing a continuous, real-time statistical analysis of the various parameters computed within the AHRS Kalman filter. When the predicted quality of the attitude calculation drops below a certain threshold, CROSS CHECK ATTITUDE is annunciated on the attitude indicator (
Figure 4-1
). The annunciation thresholds for the CROSS CHECK ATTITUDE message were determined during company flight tests, and strike a balance between minimizing nuisance annunciations (when the attitude solution is fine) and failing to annunciate (when the attitude solution is significantly degraded). This balance can occasionally result in momentary CROSS CHECK ATTITUDE annunciations, especially during aggressive maneuvering, steep or high-G turns, abrupt pitch changes, etc.
In such situations, these annunciations indicate that the statistical quality of the attitude solution is less than nominal, and that the pilot should cross-check the AHRS against alternate attitude indications. Should the annunciation persist, then degraded AHRS performance is statistically more likely to be experienced. In other words, momentary
CROSS CHECK ATTITUDE annunciations indicate that the AHRS solution is working hard enough that the AHRS quality measure has degraded to something less than that associated with normal, unaccelerated flight. This situation demands increased pilot vigilance and cross-monitoring of other cockpit instrumentation.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 4-1
Cross Check Attitude
Annunciation
Page 4-3
Page 4-4
4.1.2. Pitot Obstruction Monitor
Most light aircraft have only a single pitot and static system available for flight instrument use. As such, a common pitot and static input is shared between the PFD and analog standby instruments. Should one or both of these pitot and static lines become blocked, both the PFD and any standby airspeed and altitude indicators could display erroneous airspeed and altitude information. Furthermore, because the PFD uses pitot and static pressures as part of the AHRS attitude calculations, loss or corruption of the pitot or static pressures can also influence the accuracy of the displayed attitude information.
The PFD has been tested to be robust to these failures, either by being tolerant to incorrect pitot or static inputs, or by detecting and annunciating a degraded attitude solution. When connected to an IFR-certified GPS, the system is further able to detect and annunciate blockages in the pitot system and will fail the attitude solution before it becomes degraded. In that case, the system will red X the attitude and heading information, and display a CHECK PITOT HEAT message as a reminder to the pilot to check for ice accumulating on the pitot probe.
Once the system detects that the pitot obstruction has been cleared, the CHECK PITOT
HEAT annunciation is removed and the system automatically performs an AHRS in-flight reset.
Should a GPS failure be experienced in flight, the Pitot Obstruction Monitor continues to operate in a fail-safe mode and will continue to detect obstructions in the pitot system that may occur while airborne. However, after landing, the monitor remains active, and, as the airplane slows to taxi speeds, the system will indicate a failure of the
AHRS and annunciate CHECK PITOT HEAT. In this circumstance, restoring the GPS will restore normal monitor operation.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
In summary, loss or degradation of the PFD attitude solution is unlikely if the pilot assures the proper operation of the pitot-static system. If the pitot or static system becomes blocked, an ADAHRS internal sensor fails, or a CROSS CHECK ATTITUDE indication is frequent or persists, the attitude indication on the PFD should be considered to be compromised. In this case, the pilot must use the backup attitude indicator for attitude reference until the cause of the problem has been identified and resolved and normal system operation has been restored.
4.1.3. Heading
The PFD ADAHRS also includes a slaved compass system that provides accurate magnetic heading indications throughout most operating conditions and phases of flight. Its electronic gyros compensate for turning and acceleration errors, and its remote fluxgate compensates for gyroscopic precession errors, so there is no need for the pilot to adjust heading throughout the flight. Nonetheless, all compass systems are subject to some error, and the pilot should be aware of when and how the PFD heading indication can be affected.
The earth’s magnetic field is measured directly by a 3-axis fluxgate magnetometer built into the Remote Sensor Module (RSM), and magnetic heading is derived from the flux on a plane perpendicular to gravity, providing immunity from pitching and rolling effects. Electronic gyros and accelerometers in the PFD system are then used to stabilize that raw heading data to eliminate the short-term turning and acceleration errors seen in traditional magnetic compasses.
Together, these systems provide accurate heading indications even during aggressive maneuvering. The gyros stabilize magnetic errors while maneuvering and are slaved to the fluxgate, which continuously updates heading to compensate for gyroscopic precession. The end result is a compass system that requires no pilot action to show accurate magnetic heading throughout the flight.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 4-5
Page 4-6
Just like other compass systems, the accuracy of the fluxgate is affected by its location on the airframe. Ferrous metal structures, electrical fields produced by motors, pumps, wiring, magnets in cabin speakers and other airframe-related sources of interference either constant or momentary (i.e. operating an electric trim motor, windshield heat, pumps, etc) can all affect the accuracy of the compass. The installer can compensate for much of this interference when calibrating the RSM, but some effects cannot be eliminated. Proper location of the RSM during installation of the PFD is critical to the
AHRS performance and accuracy.
Furthermore, all magnetic compass systems are susceptible to local disturbances in the earth’s magnetic field (some of which are shown on aviation charts or by NOTAM) and will exhibit degraded performance when operating in extreme northern and southern latitudes close to the earth’s magnetic poles.
4.1.4. Free Gyro Mode
When the PFD system detects that the horizontal component of the earth’s magnetic field is no longer strong enough to provide reliable heading data, the PFD will detect the condition and annunciate that the heading system is no longer slaved to magnetic north. If the condition persists, attitude and heading indications are removed.
While the condition can occur at greater distances, it is most likely to be observed within 750 nautical miles from the magnetic poles. In the Northern Hemisphere, this equates to operations in the Arctic Islands found north of continental North America.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Two minutes after detection, a FREE GYRO MODE annunciation will be presented across the HSI, indicating the heading system no longer can be aligned with magnetic north.
Some precession of the heading is possible, especially during abrupt maneuvers. If the condition persists for four more minutes (six minutes total) the attitude and heading indicators will be removed and replaced with red X indications. When the conditions causing Free Gyro Mode are no longer present, attitude and heading indications will be restored after an automatic AHRS reset.
4.1.5. Degraded ADAHRS Performance
For Degraded ADAHRS Performance, reference the following:
• Sections 6.1. Pitot/Static System Blockage
• Sections 6.8. In-Flight AHRS Reset
• Geographic Limitations
in the
Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement
that was installed in the aircraft with your PFD.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 4-7
Figure 4-2
Attitude Indicator
Figure 4-3
Pitch and/or Roll Data Invalid
NOTE
A red X and the annunciation ATTITUDE FAIL displays on the Attitude Indicator as long as pitch or roll attitude data is invalid (
Figure 4-3
).
Page 4-8
4.2. Attitude Display
4.2.1. Attitude Indicator
The Attitude Indicator consists of an aircraft reference symbol on a blue (sky) and brown (ground) background. The white horizon line separates the sky from the ground and extends to the edge of the display. The Roll Scale curves over the top of the
Attitude Indicator while the Pitch Scale extends vertically in the middle. The slip/skid rectangle is directly underneath the roll pointer (
Figure 4-2
).
Sky
Aircraft Reference Symbol
Horizon Line
Ground
Flight Director
Roll Scale
Roll Pointer
Slip/Skid Indicator
Pitch Scale
The Attitude Indicator cannot be disabled by the pilot. The Aircraft Reference Symbol is fixed relative to the Attitude Indicator and overlays all other Attitude Indicator symbols.
Pitch and roll panel tilt adjustments are is provided to installers to compensate for variations in installations and tilted panels.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
4.2.1.1. Roll Scale
The Roll Scale is displayed at the top of the Attitude Indicator and comprises a moving scale set against a fixed, white, triangle roll pointer. Tick marks are displayed at 0º, 10º,
20º, 30º, 45º, and 60º of roll. The 45º marks are triangles.
4.2.1.2. Pitch Scale
The pitch scale consists of minor pitch marks in 2.5º increments up to ±20º and major pitch marks in 10º increments up to ±90º. Red chevrons come into view for nose-up pitch angles of 15º or more (
Figure 4-4
), and nose-down pitch angles of 10º or less
(
Figure 4-5
). The pitch chevrons aid the pilot in unusual attitude recovery.
The range of movement of the background sky and ground boundaries are limited so that some sky or ground is always visible.
4.2.1.3. Slip/Skid Indicator
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the small white rectangle under the roll pointer. The Slip/
Skid Indicator moves left and right relative to the roll pointer in proportion to lateral acceleration. The width of the rectangle is equivalent to the width of the ball in a mechanical inclinometer.
4.2.1.4. Flight Director
1
When connected to a compatible autopilot and configured through an ACU during installation, the PFD displays a single-cue (two-axis) flight director on the Attitude
Indicator (
Figure 4-6
). The pilot may follow the flight director’s pitch and roll cues, even when the autopilot is not engaged, to remain on heading or altitude, climb or descend, turn, or navigate along a programmed flight path.
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 4-4
Pitch Markings
Large Pitch Down
Figure 4-5
Pitch Markings
Large Pitch Up
Figure 4-6
Flight Director
NOTE
Refer to the autopilot’s AFMS for information on the operation of the flight director. The Flight Director is a visual representation of the pitch and roll commands from the autopilot. The Flight Director’s pitch and bank limits are based on the emulation mode set at installation and are limited to +/- 45° roll and +/- 25° pitch.
Page 4-9
Page 4-10
Figure 4-7
Airspeed Indicator
4.2.2. Airspeed Indicator
The Airspeed Indicator comprises a moving tape, airspeed bug, and numerical airspeed value (drum). Textual Vspeeds, color Speed Bands, and Speed Markers are also rendered on the moving tape (
Figure 4-7
).
Selected Airspeed Field
Color Speed Bands
Textual Vspeeds
Initial Flap Extension Speed Marker
Airspeed Tape
Speed Marker
Numerical Airspeed Value (drum)
Selected Airspeed Bug
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Indicated airspeed is displayed in knots, miles per hour or Mach number, set at installation, with tick marks rendered on the Airspeed tape every ten (10) units. Speed
Bands and Speed Markers are configured during installation and cannot be changed or removed by the pilot. The textual Vspeeds are pilot-configurable and are discussed in
Chapter 5, Customizing the PFD
. Although the pilot can set the selected airspeed
(bug), there is no visual or aural annunciation provided when the actual airspeed deviates from the selected airspeed value.
The numerical airspeed value is displayed in a rolling drum format in the center of the airspeed tape with numbers moving downward as speed increases, and upward as speed decreases. The display range of the indicated airspeed is 20–450 (knots or miles per hour). The numerical airspeed value is displayed in red when Vne is exceeded or when the airspeed drops below Vs0 during stalls or landing roll-outs (
Figure 4-8
).
Figure 4-8
Actual Airspeed Greater Than the Vne
NOTE
When airspeed is less than 30 knots but ground GPS speed is greater than 50 knots, a red X and annunciation of CHECK PITOT HEAT is displayed on the Attitude Indicator
(
Figure 4-9
)
.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 4-9
Pitot Obstruction Monitoring
Airspeed <30kts, Ground Speed >50kts
Annunciation
Page 4-11
Figure 4-10
Airspeed Bug Selected to Edit
Figure 4-11
New Airspeed Selected
NOTE
A typical installation sets the Tapes (TPS) display to UNLOCKED, allowing the pilot to display or hide the Airspeed and Altitude Tapes as desired. If the Airspeed and Altitude Tapes were LOCKED ON during installation, the Tapes will remain on. If the
Airspeed and Altitude Tapes were LOCKED OFF during installation, the Tapes will not display.
Page 4-12
4.2.2.1. Selected Airspeed
The Selected Airspeed Field value and associated Airspeed Bug are shown on the
Airspeed Tape. The Selected Airspeed Field value is shown at the top of the Airspeed
Tape. The Airspeed Bug is displayed next to the Airspeed Tape when the Selected
Airspeed value is within the visible range of the tape. The Selected Airspeed Field’s default value is 20 knots Indicated Airspeed (IAS), or the value previously set. SYNCing the IAS field sets the Selected Airspeed Field value to the current indicated airspeed
(
Section 2.2.1.3
). Setting the Selected Airspeed Field to a value less than 20 disables the Airspeed Bug and dashes the Selected Airspeed Field value.
Set Airspeed Bug
1. Press the Left Knob until IAS is shown above the Left Knob.
The Airspeed Field and Airspeed Bug appear in magenta - enabled for editing (
Figure
4-10
).
2. Rotate the Left Knob clockwise to increase, or counterclockwise to decrease the airspeed value in the Selected Airspeed Field.
After 10 seconds of inactivity, label, field and bug appear in cyan (
Figure 4-11
).
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
4.2.2.2. Airspeed Display
In some configurations, such as a stand-alone PFD, the airspeed tape can be turned off at the pilot’s discretion to facilitate screen declutter. This setting will be retained when the PFD system is turned off then powered on again.
Hide/Display Airspeed Tape
1. Press MENU Button.
2. Rotate Right Knob until first Menu Key displays TPS (
Figure 4-12
).
3. Press TPS Menu Key.
TPS label and EDIT VALUE label (above Right Knob) appear in magenta.
4. Rotate Right Knob to the desired value: ENABLE or DISABLE (
Figure 4-13
).
5. Press MENU Button to exit.
NOTE
The Altitude Tape can also be turned off for screen declutter. Setting will be retained when PFD is turned off.
NOTE
When the Airspeed Tape is disabled, the numerical display of the selected airspeed remains An installer can disable and remove the Selected Airspeed Field from the display.
091-00005-001 REV F
Figure 4-12
Editing Airspeed Tape Display
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 4-13
Airspeed Tape Disabled
Page 4-13
Figure 4-13a
Altitude Transition Setting
4.2.2.3. MACH Number Display for Mmo Aircraft
For Mmo aircraft, the PFD can show aircraft Mach number in the Data Bar with a display resolution of 0.01 Mach.
The Mach number (configured during initial installation) can be displayed for either altitude or speed transition.
When configured to ALTITUDE transition, the TAS indication will be replaced by the
Mach number whenever the aircraft is above the selected transition altitude.
When configured to SPEED transition, the TAS indication will be replaced by the Mach number whenever the aircraft is above the selected transition Mach number.
Select the Altitude or Speed Transition setting
1. Press the MENU Button and rotate the Right Knob to the GENERAL
SETTINGS C page.
2. Press the MACH DSPL Menu Key and rotate the Right Knob to the desired
Altitude setting (
Figure 4-13a
) or Speed setting (
Figure 4-13b
).
3. Press the MENU Button to exit.
Figure 4-13b
Speed Transition Setting
NOTE
Refer to
Chapter 5, Table 5-3
, Menu - General Settings
C for the available Altitude and Speed settings
Page 4-14
NOTE
The installer will configure the PFD to display redline or barber pole airspeed limits that vary with pressure altitude. The colors are configured to correspond with the aircraft’s approved markings on the mechanical airspeed indicator.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
4.2.3. Altimeter
The altimeter comprises an Altitude Bug, Numerical Altitude Value (drum), Altitude Tape,
Altitude Trend Vector, MINIMUMS annunciation, Selected Altitude Field value, Decision
Height Annunciation, Altitude Alerter and an aural tone (when configured) DH (
Figure
4-14
).
Altitude Alerter
Selected Altitude Field
Minimums Marker
Numerical Altitude Value
Altitude Tape
MINIMUMS Annunciation/
Selected MINIMUMS Field
Radio Altitude / Decision
Height Window
Decision Height
Annunciation
Altitude Trend Vector
The Altitude Tape range is from -1,600 to 51,000 feet. Major tick marks are provided every 100 feet and minor tick marks every 20 feet. A barometric pressure adjustment
(BARO) is provided to the pilot to accurately display the aircraft’s altitude above mean sea level.
The Numerical Altitude Value is shown in a rolling drum format in the center of the
Altimeter Tape, with numbers moving downward as the altitude increases and upward as altitude decreases. The Numerical Altitude Value shows the altitude to the nearest
20 feet.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 4-14
Altimeter
Page 4-15
Page 4-16
Figure 4-18
Editing BARO
Units of Measure
GENERAL SETTINGS B
Figure 4-19
Editing BARO from in to mB
Figure 4-20
BARO Set to mB (millibars)
Figure 4-15
Altitude Failure
Figure 4-16
Baro Shown in Inches of Mercury
Figure 4-17
Baro Shown in Millibars
An adjacent, magenta Altitude Trend Vector predicts the anticipated altitude, in the next six seconds, if the current rate of climb or decent is maintained. Like the VSI, there is a slight lag in the indication. If the ribbon meets or exceeds the display limit, the vertical trend is large. The Altitude
Trend Vector does not display when the altitude remains constant.
If the altitude exceeds 51,000 feet, the Numerical Altitude Value is dashed, and the tape is frozen at this limit. All altitude information is removed and replaced with a red X with the textual annunciation of ALT FAIL when altitude data is invalid (
Figure 4-15
).
4.2.3.1. Barometric Units of Measure
Barometric units of measure adjustment may be made in either inches of mercury (in) (
Figure 4-16
) or millibars (mB) (
Figure 4-17
), as configured by the pilot in the Menu. The adjustment range is 28.10 – 30.99 inches
Hg or 946 – 1049 mB. The barometric pressure default value is 29.92 inches, or as previously set.
Set Barometric Units of Measure
1. Press the MENU Button.
2. Rotate the Right Knob to select the GENERAL SETTINGS B page
(
Figure 4-18
).
3. Press the BARO Menu Key.
The Menu label turns magenta, and the EDIT VALUE label displays above the Right Knob (
Figure 4-19
).
4. Rotate the Right Knob to select either in or mB (
Figure 4-20
).
5. Press the MENU Button to exit.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Set the Barometric Pressure
1. Press the BARO Hot Key.
The BARO label above the Right Knob and Barometric Pressure Setting Field appear in magenta (
Figure 4-21
).
2. Rotate the Right Knob to change the value of the Barometric Pressure
Setting Field.
3. Press the BARO Hot Key or any knob, button/key to exit.
If no action is taken, after 10 seconds of inactivity, the label, and field are rendered in cyan.
4.2.3.2. Selected Altitude Field
The Selected Altitude Field value is displayed at the top of the Altitude Tape. The
Selected Altitude Field range is 100 to 51,000 feet, in 100 foot increments. The default value for the Selected Altitude value is 100 feet, or the previously set value.
Additionally, the Altitude Bug is displayed adjacent to the Altitude Tape and at the
Selected Altitude Field value when within the visible range of the current altitude.
Set Altitude Bug and Altitude Alerter
1. Press the Right Knob until ALT displays above the Right Knob.
The Selected Altitude Field and bug are enabled for editing, all rendered in magenta
(
Figure 4-22
).
2. Rotate the Right Knob (clockwise to increase, or counterclockwise to decrease) to change the value of the Selected Altitude Field.
Once the correct value is selected, and after 10 seconds of inaction, the field is disabled, and the label, field, and bug are rendered in cyan.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 4-21
BARO Field Enabled
WARNING
Always check and set the PFD BARO whenever the mechanical altimeter is adjusted
NOTE
Since the altitude tape display is limited to approximately 400 feet, the altitude bug symbol is shown on the altitude tape when the Selected Altitude
Field value is within the visible range of the current altitude.
Page 4-17
NOTE
Rotating the knob quickly will change the altitude value in larger increments.
4.2.3.3. Altitude Level-Off and Deviation Alert
The Altitude (level-off ) Alert is ARMED and rendered on-screen as a yellow alert flag next to the Selected Altitude value when the aircraft altitude transitions to within
200 feet or 15 seconds of reaching the selected altitude (
Figure 4-23
). If an optional
Sonalert tone generator device is installed, a one-second tone also sounds. Once the current altitude is within ± 25 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Altitude Alert extinguishes (
Figure 4-24
).
After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the aircraft’s current altitude differs from the selected altitude by more than 200 feet, the yellow alert flag flashes. If an optional
Sonalert tone generator device is installed, a one-second tone also sounds.
Page 4-18
Figure 4-22
Altitude Bug and Altitude Alerter Enabled
Figure 4-23
Altitude Alert
Figure 4-24
Altitude Alert Extinguishes at
Selected Altitude
NOTE
Setting the Altitude Alerter provides visual and aural cues to help the pilot capture and maintain target altitudes. When set to a new altitude, the Alerter will illuminate a yellow flag adjacent to the target altitude display and sound a one-second tone; 15 seconds (or 200 feet) before the aircraft will reach the target altitude (based on current rate of climb or descent).
The yellow flag will extinguish once the target is reached. Subsequently, if the aircraft deviates more than 200 feet above or below the target altitude, the flag will again illuminate, and another one-second tone will sound to alert the pilot to the deviation.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
4.2.3.4. MINIMUMS Annunciation
1
The Pro PFD provides an adjustable MINIMUMS field to enhance situational awareness during instrument approaches. The Pro PFD provides a MINIMUMS annunciation with a series of markers on the Altitude Tape that provide the pilot with improved awareness when approaching and operating at minimums. There are three different color markers that are shown on the altitude tape that are associated with the MINIMUMS
Annunciation, as described in
Table 4-1
.
Marker Color Description
Green
The aircraft is 500 feet above selected
MINIMUM.
Figure 4-25
Minimums Green Triangle
Hollow Yellow
The aircraft is 100 feet to 200 feet above the selected MINIMUM.
The marker base is at 100 feet above
MINIMUM, and the tip is at 200 feet above
MINIMUM.
Figure 4-26
Minimums Hollow Yellow Triangle
Red and
Yellow stripes
The aircraft is at the selected MINIMUM.
Table 4-1
Selected MINIMUMS Markers
091-00005-001 REV F
Figure 4-27
Minimums Red/ Yellow Striped Triangle
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
Page 4-19
Page 4-20
Once the Selected Minimums field value is set to a Decision Altitude, Decision Height, or Minimum Descent Altitude, the Pro PFD provides an alert when the aircraft descends below this altitude. To activate this feature, enable the Selected Minimums (MIN) field and set the value with the Right Knob.
Display/Hide Minimums
1. Press the MIN Hot Key to alternately hide or display the Selected Minimums
Field, MINIMUMS Annunciation, and Markers (
Figures 4-28 and 4-29
).
The range for the MIN data field is 0 – 15,000 feet, in increments of 10 feet. SYNCing sets the Selected Minimums field value to the current altitude (
Section 2.2.1.3
). The default value is 100 feet, or the previously set value.
Figure 4-28
MIN Hot Key – Selected MINIMUMS
Annunciation and Markers Disabled
NOTE
Pressing the MIN Hot Key presents the MINIMUMS Markers on the Altitude Tape and the
Selected Minimums Field on the Attitude Display. The MIN label above the Right Knob and the MIN field value are rendered in magenta for editing.
Figure 4-29
Selected MINIMUMS
Annunciation and Markers
Enabled
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Set Altitude Minimum
1. Press the MIN Hot Key to set the altitude minimum.
The Selected MINIMUMS Field and the MIN label above the Right Knob are rendered in magenta (
Figure 4-30
).
2. Rotate the Right Knob to change the value of the Selected MINIMUMS Field.
Once the correct value is selected, and after 10 seconds of inaction, the field is disabled
(
Figure 4-31
).
Whenever the aircraft is at or below the Selected MINIMUMS setting, the MIN legend in the Selected Minimums Field turns inverse amber (
Figure 4-32)
and when configured with an optional Sonalert, a one-second stuttered tone is generated.
The inverse amber MIN Annunciation is cancelled when the aircraft is 100 feet above the selected minimums setting or when the selected minimums is set to a new altitude.
Additionally, the MINIMUMS Markers on the Altitude Tape provide the pilot with additional awareness of aircraft altitude with respect to the set MINIMUMS.
Figure 4-30
Selected MINIMUMS Field -
MIN Enabled
Figure 4-31
New Selected MINIMUMS
Annunciation Setting
Figure 4-32
MINIMUMS
Annunciation Active
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 4-21
Figure 4-32a
Radio Altitude
Figure 4-33
DH Annunciation
Figure 4-32b
Radio Altitude with red slash
NOTE
“RAD ALT: DISABLE” Menu Key label is shown in gray if a compatible radio altimeter is not installed.
Page 4-22
4.2.3.5. Radio Altitude Display
1
When a compatible radio altimeter is connected to the Evolution Display, radio altitude height in feet above ground level (AGL) can be displayed at the bottom left of the
Attitude Display
Figure 4-32a
. When the aircraft is above the maximum range of the radio altimeter, the Radio Altimeter display window is removed. The maximum displayed altitude value will depend on the range of the radar altimeter equipment installed in the aircraft.
Radio Altitudes that are greater than or equal to 500 feet AGL are displayed in 100 foot increments (RA 500, RA 600, RA 700...) and altitudes less than 500 feet AGL are displayed in 10 foot increments (RA 490, RA 480, RA 470...)
The digital readout in the Radio Altitude (RA) window is normally displayed in green, however, when the aircraft is at or below the Decision Height (DH) set on the onboard radio altimeter’s indicator (if applicable), the RA window on the PFD will show the DH legend as inverse amber and the current RA readout in amber. An amber DH (Decision
Height annunciation is also displayed near the upper left corner of the Attitude Display
(
Figure 4-33
).
If the PFD detects a malfunction on the onboard radio altimeter, the RA window is displayed with a red slash through the digital readout
Figure 4-32b
.
Enable or Disable the Radio Altitude Display
1. Press the MENU Button and rotate the Right Knob to the GENERAL SETTINGS
A page.
2. Press the RAD ALT Menu Key and rotate the Right Knob to toggle between
ENABLE or DISABLE.
3. Press the MENU Button to exit.
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
4.2.3.6. Altitude Display
In some configurations, such as a stand-alone PFD, the altitude tape can be turned off, at the pilot’s discretion, to facilitate screen declutter. Both Airspeed and Altitude tapes are affected by this action.
Hide/Display Airspeed and Altitude Tape
1. Press the MENU Button.
2. Rotate the Right Knob counterclockwise until GENERAL SETTINGS A page displays (
Figure 4-34
).
3. Press the TPS Menu Key.
The Menu label turns magenta, and the EDIT VALUE label displays above the Right
Knob.
4. Rotate the Right Knob to the desired value, ENABLE (On) or DISABLE (Off )
(
Figure 4-35
).
5. Press the MENU Button to exit.
NOTE
A typical PFD only installation sets the tapes display to UNLOCKED, allowing the pilot to display or hide the Airspeed and Altitude tapes as desired. If the
Airspeed and Altitude Tapes were LOCKED ON during installation, such as the case with a PFD and MFD configuration, then the tapes must remain on. If the
Airspeed and Altitude Tapes were LOCKED OFF during installation, the tapes will not display.
Figure 4-34
Editing Airspeed and Altitude Tape Display
091-00005-001 REV F
Figure 4-35
Airspeed and Altitude Tape Disabled
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
NOTE
When the Altitude tape is disabled, the numerical display of the selected altitude and altitude minimums remain on. However, an installer can disable and remove the Selected Altitude and Minimums Fields, and the MINIMUMS Annunciation and Markers from the display.
Page 4-23
Figure 4-36
Data Bar
NOTE
If the OAT was set to disabled during installation, as would be the case if the RSM is mounted internally to the aircraft structure, then the OAT, TAS, and Wind
Speed and Direction are not displayed.
4.3. Data Bar
The Data Bar presents True Airspeed (TAS) or the Mach number, GPS Ground Speed (GS),
Outside Air Temperature (OAT), Wind Direction, Wind Speed, and Barometric Pressure
Setting, as shown in
Figure 4-36
. The Data Bar is always present on the display. Invalid or out-of-range Data Bar values are dashed.
True Airspeed (TAS) or MACH
Barometric Pressure Setting
Field
Wind Speed
Wind Direction
Wind Direction Arrow
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
Ground Speed (GS)
4.3.1. True Airspeed or Mach Number (when enabled)
The True Airspeed (TAS) or the Mach number is displayed in the upper left of the Data
Bar. The TAS has a range of 20–999 knots or mph, using the same unit of measurement as the aircraft’s Airspeed Indicator. The TAS is a correction of the IAS for nonstandard pressure and temperature.
The Mach number can be configured to be displayed whenever the aircraft is above a selected altitude or above a selected Mach number and is shown with a display resolution of 0.01 Mach.
Page 4-24
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Select the Transition Setting
1. Press the MENU Button and rotate the Right Knob to the GENERAL SETTINGS
C page.
2 Press the MACH DSPL Hot Key and rotate the Right Knob to the desired
Altitude or Speed setting.
3. Press the MENU Button to exit.
4.3.2. Ground Speed
The Ground Speed (GS) comes from a configured GPS navigator and is digitally displayed in the lower left corner of the Data Bar with a value range of 5–999 knots or mph, using the same unit of measurement as the Airspeed Indicator.
4.3.3. Outside Air Temperature (when enabled)
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) is displayed in the center of the Data Bar (
Figure
4-36
). The temperature is obtained from the temperature sensor located in the RSM.
Temperature sensor ranges from -55°C to +80°C (-67°F to +176°F).
Set OAT Units of Measure
1. Press the MENU Button.
2. Rotate the Right Knob counterclockwise until GENERAL SETTINGS B page displays.
3. Press the OAT Menu Key.
The Menu label turns magenta and the EDIT VALUE label displays above the Right Knob
(
Figure 4-37
).
4. Rotate the Right Knob to select either °C or °F (
Figure 4-37
).
5. Press the MENU Button to exit.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 4-37
Select OAT Units of Measure
Page 4-25
Figure 4-38
Wind Direction Arrow
NOTE
The wind computations require a GPS-provided ground track and ground speed to compute the wind direction and speed. If a GPS is not connected to the
PFD or the data are invalid, the wind direction and speed are dashed and the wind direction arrow is removed.
4.3.4. Wind Speed, Direction, and Arrow (when enabled)
The Wind Speed, Direction, and Direction Arrow are displayed in the lower right portion of the Data Bar. The Wind Speed has a range of 10–999 knots or mph, using the same unit of measure as the Airspeed Indicator.
The Wind Direction and Arrow (
Figure 4-38
) have a range of 001°–360°, using the same direction reference used by the Direction Indicator. The arrow points in the direction of the wind and is displayed relative to the current direction of flight. For example, if the current direction of flight is 360° and the wind is from 360°, the arrow will point straight down on the display (a headwind blowing toward your aircraft).
When the computed wind speed is below 10 knots or mph (depending on aircraft configuration) the wind speed and direction values are blank, and the wind arrow is removed. If the wind data is out of range or invalid, the values are dashed, and the wind arrow is removed.
4.3.5. Barometric Pressure Setting Display
The Barometric Pressure Setting Field is displayed on the upper right corner of the Data
Bar and is pilot-adjustable, as discussed in
Section 4.2.3.1
. When the Altitude Tape is disabled, the Barometric Pressure Setting field remains visible. However, an installer can disable the field and remove it from the display.
Section 4.2.3.1
provides complete information and step-by-step instructions for setting the barometric pressure.
Page 4-26
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
4.4. Navigation Display
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) on the Navigation Display of the PFD, combines a Direction Indicator with a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) (
Figure 4-39
).
The Direction Indicator comprises a compass, numerical direction indication, heading bug, Ground Track Marker (when GPS ground track information is available), rate of turn indicator, and aircraft ownship symbol. The CDI is comprises a selected course pointer,
Deviation Scale and indicator, TO/FROM indicators, and selected navigation source label and information block.
CDI Source Info Block
Magnetic Heading
Rate of Turn Indicator
Selected Heading Field
Ground Track Marker
Course Pointer
TO/FROM Indicator
Aircraft Ownship Symbol
Heading Bug
Selected CDI Navigation Source
Course Deviation Scale
Compass Scale
Course Deviation Indicator
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 4-39
Horizontal Situation Indicator
NOTE
The size, shape and location of the Course Pointer,
Deviation Scale, and Deviation Indicator depend on the Compass Mode selected..
Page 4-27
Figure 4-40
360° Compass Mode
Figure 4-41
ARC HSI Compass Mode
Page 4-28
All Magnetic Headings are displayed in degrees. The value range is from 001° - 360°, always displayed in three digits, and use leading zeros when applicable. The Magnetic
North is expressed as 360°.
4.4.1. Compass
The PFD offers three Compass Modes: 360°, ARC HSI, and ARC CDI. The default Compass
Mode is 360. The aircraft’s heading is always expressed degrees magnetic. The magnetic headings inside of the compass scale omit the last zero for brevity (i.e., 30°, 60°, 120°,
150°, 210°, 240°, 300°, and 330° are labeled 3, 6, 12, 15, 21, 24, 30, and 33, respectively).
The four cardinal compass headings are shown as letters (i.e., N for 360°, E for 090°, S for
180°, and W for 270°).
4.4.1.1. 360° Compass Mode
The 360° Compass Mode displays a full 360° compass rose with all other components of the Direction Indicator. The 360° compass rose rotation centers on the aircraft ownship symbol so that the numerical direction indication corresponds to the current aircraft heading (
Figure 4-40
).
4.4.1.2. ARC Compass Mode
The two ARC Compass Modes have an abbreviated 100° ARC compass scale. All other elements of the Direction Indicator are retained. The ARC Compass Mode’s scale rotation centers on the aircraft ownship symbol so that the numerical direction indication corresponds to the current aircraft heading. The default ARC Compass Mode is ARC HSI.
The ARC HSI Compass Mode presents a rotating CDI, similar to that used in the 360°
Compass Mode (
Figure 4-41
).
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
The ARC CDI Compass Mode uses a fixed CDI, resembling a contemporary GPS navigation deviation display. The ARC CDI Compass Mode is intended to maximize the lower display area for map and flight plan data (
Figure 4-42
).
Select ARC CDI/HSI Compass Mode
1. Press the MENU Button.
2. Rotate the Right Knob to the GENERAL SETTINGS A Menu page
(
Figure 4-43
).
3. Press the ARC MODE Menu Key. The Menu label turns magenta, and the EDIT
VALUE label displays above the Right Knob (
Figure 4-44
).
4. Rotate the Right Knob to select either HSI or CDI (
Figure 4-45
).
5. Press the MENU Button to exit.
Figure 4-44
Changing the ARC Compass MODE
091-00005-001 REV F
Figure 4-42
ARC CDI Compass Mode
Figure 4-43
GENERAL SETTINGS A
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 4-45
ARC CDI Compass MODE Selected
Page 4-29
Select Compass Type
1. Press the 360/ARC Hot Key (
Figure 4-46
) to alternately select either the 360° or ARC Compass Mode.
The Navigation Display changes and the Hot Key label reflects the currently selected
Compass Mode (
Figures 4-47 and 4-48
).
Figure 4-46
360/ARC Hot Key
Page 4-30
Figure 4-47
ARC CDI Compass Mode
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 4-48
360˚ Compass Mode
091-00005-001 REV F
4.4.2. Course Pointer
1
For all Compass Modes, the arrowhead of the Course Pointer aligns with the corresponding value on the compass scale regardless of the aircraft heading. The ARC
Compass HSI and CDI Course Pointers are different and are described in
Table 4-2
.
COMPASS
ARC HSI
DESCRIPTION
The Course Pointer length shortens as necessary when rotated to remain within the display area (
Figure 4-49
).
ARC CDI
The Course Pointer is shown as a stub arrow or tail whenever the CRS value or its reciprocal falls within the displayable range of the compass scale arc
(
Figure 4-50
and
4-51
).
Table 4-2
ARC Compass Mode Course Pointer Display
Figure 4-49
Reduced Length Course Pointer,
ARC HSI Compass Mode
Figure 4-49
Reduced Length Course Pointer,
ARC HSI Compass Mode
Figure 4-50
Stub Course Arrowhead ,
ARC CDI Compass Mode
Figure 4-50
Stub Course Arrowhead,
ARC CDI Compass Mode
Figure 4-51
Stub Course Tail , ARC
CDI Compass Mode
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 4-51
Stub Course Tail,
ARC CDI Compass Mode
Page 4-31
Page 4-32
Figure 4-52
360° TO Indication
Figure 4-53
360° FROM Indication
Figure 4-54
HSI TO Indication
Figure 4-55
HSI FROM Indication
4.4.3. TO/FROM Indicator
1
Each of the Compass Modes has a TO/FROM indicator. The TO/FROM indicator shows whether the aircraft is heading toward a waypoint or radio navaid, or from a waypoint or radio navaid. For each Compass Mode, the TO/FROM indication is slightly different, as described in
Table 4-3
.
COMPASS
360°
DESCRIPTION
The TO indicator is an arrowhead on the top half of the Course Pointer, oriented in the same direction as the course arrowhead
(
Figure 4-52
). The FROM indicator is an arrowhead on the bottom half of the Course Pointer, oriented in the direction opposite to the course arrowhead (
Figure 4-53
).
ARC HSI
The TO indicator is shown as two arrowheads, one on each half of the
Course Pointer, oriented in the same direction as the course arrowhead
(
Figure 4-54
). The FROM indicator is shown as two arrowheads, one on each half of the Course Pointer, oriented opposite to the direction of the course arrowhead (
Figure 4-55
).
ARC CDI
Table 4-3
TO/FROM Indicator Description
The TO indication is shown as TO on the left side of the Deviation Scale
(
Figure 4-56
). The FROM indication is shown as FROM on the right of the
Deviation Scale (
Figure 4-57
).
Figure 4-56
CDI TO Indication
Figure 4-57
CDI FROM Indication
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
4.4.4. Course Deviation Indicator and Scale
1
Selected course deviation is depicted by a Course Deviation Indicator and Scale.
Deviation is indicated by positioning the Course Deviation Indicator on the Scale corresponding to the lateral deviation value.
The 360° and ARC HSI Compass Modes show the CDI as a green line centered on the display and parallel with the Course Pointer. The scale is a set of four hollow, green dots that are perpendicular to the Course Pointer (
Figure 4-58
).
Course Deviation Indicator
Course Deviation Scale
The ARC CDI Compass Mode’s CDI and Scale are located at the bottom of the lower display. The indicator is a green diamond, and the Scale is a set of four hollow, white dots with a white index mark at the center (
Figure 4-59
). When in the ARC CDI
Compass Mode, on a Localizer Back Course approach, a BC label is presented to the left of the scale, and the Indicator corrects for reverse sensing (
Figure 4-60
).
When the lateral deviation exceeds the maximum displayable range of 2.5 dots, the Deviation Indicator bar or diamond, as applicable, becomes hollow and darker
(
Figure 4-61
and
4-62
).
Figure 4-59
Course Deviation Indicator, ARC CDI
Compass Mode
091-00005-001 REV F
Figure 4-60
Course Deviation Indicator, ARC CDI
Compass Mode with Back Course
Figure 4-62
Deviation Exceeded, ARC CDI
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 4-58
Deviation Indicator, 360° and
ARC HSI Compass Modes
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
Figure 4-61
Exceeded Deviation, 360° and
ARC HSI Compass Modes
Page 4-33
Figure 4-62a
Back Course (BC) Annunciation Locations
Page 4-34
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
4.4.4.a. Localizer Back Course (BC) Operation
1
When flying a Back Course final approach (the aircraft heading is opposite to the localizer front course), set the CRS value to the front course localizer or ILS approach value. The tail of the CDI will match the back course runway’s magnetic orientation.
When the LOC(BC) mode is active, two “BC” annunciations are shown; on the Attitude
Display left of the Lateral Deviation Indicator (LDI) and on the ARC Compass left of the
Course Deviation Scale (
Figure 4-62a
). The left/right deviation indications are corrected for reverse sensing and will behave intuitively, the same as with a front course localizer.
4.4.5. CDI Navigation Source
1
When the PFD powers up, the default Selected CDI Navigation Source is the last source selected. The pilot can select from any of the installed navigation sources using the
Middle Button. The PFD supports navigation information display from VHF Omnidirectional Radio Range (VOR) navaids, Localizers (LOC), Glide Slope receivers (GS), and
Global Positioning Systems (GPS). There can be up to four dedicated, two integrated, or a combination of one integrated and two dedicated navigation systems installed.
When individual GPS and VLOC devices are installed, the GPSS signal source, Basemap
GPS position, flight plan, and Basemap information for VLOC1, VLOC2, and GPS1 are provided by the GPS1 navigation source whenever GPS1 is selected as the CDI navigation source and by GPS2 whenever GPS2 is selected as the Selected CDI navigation source.
When integrated GPS/VLOC equipment are installed, the GPSS signal source, Basemap
GPS position, flight plan and Basemap information for the integrated GPS-VLOC is provided by the associated GPS whenever the CDI navigation source is selected to either the GPS side or the VLOC side of the integrated GPS/VLOC receiver.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Select the CDI Navigation Source
• Press the CDI Navigation Source Select button until the desired navigation source is displayed above the button (e.g., GPS1, GPS2, VLOC1, VLOC2)
(
Figure 4-63
).
CDI Navigation Source Select Button
Selected CDI Source Label
CDI Source Information Block
091-00005-001 REV F
Figure 4-63
CDI Source selection and Information
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
NOTE
For integrated systems, the CDI navigation source label indicates the current operating mode (GPS or VLOC) of the GPS/VHF NAV system.
When an integrated system is selected but not reporting its operating mode, VLOC1 or VLOC2 is shown as the Selected CDI Navigation Source.
Refer to the GPS or VHF NAV AFMS for information on the operation of the connected navigation equipment.
NOTE
When the PFD is connected to some GPS and the active flight plan is changed (e.g. “Direct To” is selected), the display of the active (magenta) leg on the Nav
Map may be delayed for up to 20 seconds. The Course
Pointer and autopilot will react immediately to the flight plan change.
NOTE
There are many radio configurations available. Your authorized Aspen Avionics Dealer can explain the configuration used on your aircraft.
Page 4-35
Page 4-36
Figure 4-64
CDI Source Information Block
Whenever the CDI Navigation Source’s data is valid, a CDI Source Information Block for the selected source is shown in the upper left corner of the Navigation Display, as shown in
Figure 4-64
and described in
Table 4-4
.
Radio Mode
GPS
Information Block Label
VHF
VOR
Localizer
Localizer Back
ILS
GPS1 or GPS2
VOR1 or VOR2
LOC1 or LOC2
LOC1(BC) or LOC2 (BC)
ILS1 or ILS2
Table 4-4
VHF NAV Radio Modes
Selected CDI Navigation Source
Waypoint identifier or tuned frequency (when available)
Bearing (in degrees)/Distance (in Nautical Miles) to waypoint or navaid
(when available)
Estimated Time Enroute (Hours:Minutes)
If both the station identifier and the tuned frequency of the associated VHF NAV radio are available, only the station identifier is displayed on the second line of the information block. In most cases, however, only the tuned frequency is available for display from integrated GPS/VLOC devices.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
When available, the bearing and distance to station is displayed on the third line of the information block in the format dddº/nnnn or dddº/nn.n, where ddd is the bearing in degrees and nnnn or nn.n is the distance in nautical miles (e.g., 360º/1103 or 322º/3.2, shown in
Figure 4-64
). The distance to waypoint is displayed as follows:
• Distance to waypoint < 100 NM, display is in tenths of a mile, i.e., ##.#.
• Distance to waypoint is 100–9999 NM, display in whole miles, i.e., ####.
• Distance to waypoint is > 9999 NM, display is dashed, i.e., ----.
When available, the estimated time enroute information is displayed on the fourth line of the information block in the format h:mm (where h is hours and mm is minutes).
When CDI Navigation Source data is invalid or unavailable from a configured navigation source, the HSI course deviation bar and the TO/FROM indicator are removed from the display (
Figure 4-65
). Additionally, the selected CDI Navigation Source label in the CDI
Source Information Block is slashed with a red line (
Figure 4-66
).
When information for a configured and selected navigation source is unavailable or is invalid, the CDI Source Information Block is blank (
Figure 4-67
).
091-00005-001 REV F
Figure 4-65
No Course Deviation Bar or
TO/FROM Indicator
Figure 4-66
Invalid CDI Navigation Source Label
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 4-67
CDI Source Information Blank Block
Figure 4-68
Menu, GENERAL SETTINGS
Page 4-37
Figure 4-69
Editing AUTOCRS
Page 4-38
Figure 4-70
AUTOCRS Enabled
Figure 4-71
AUTOCRS Enabled
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
4.4.6. Auto Course
1
The pilot can either use the Auto Course (AUTOCRS) or manually set a CRS value. By default, AUTOCRS is enabled. When the selected CDI Navigation Source is a connected
GPS receiver and AUTOCRS is enabled, CRS is not adjustable (current course value is automatically slewed and controlled by the desired track from the GPS). When
AUTOCRS is enabled, the CDI navigation source is a GPS, and that system is configured for automatic waypoint sequencing (i.e., not OBS or HOLD modes) then Auto Course
Select is active.
Enable Auto Course
1. Press the MENU Button.
2. Rotate the Right Knob to the GENERAL SETTINGS A page (
Figure 4-68
).
3. Press the AUTOCRS Menu Key.
The Menu label turns magenta, and the EDIT VALUE label displays above the Right Knob
(
Figure 4-69
).
4. Rotate the Right Knob to select ENABLE (
Figure 4-70
).
5. Press the MENU Button to exit.
When AUTOCRS is enabled, the CRS value is set to the desired track output from the CDI
Navigation Source. The CRS value is shown in the upper left of the lower display area in green under the CRS label. Additionally, an inverse green A is shown beside the CRS label in the upper left of the lower display area and in the legend above the Left Knob.
This indicates that the course is being automatically adjusted (
Figure 4-71
).
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Disable Auto Course
1. Press the MENU Button.
2. Rotate the Right Knob to the GENERAL SETTINGS A page (
Figure 4-72
).
3. Press the AUTOCRS Menu Key.
The Menu label turns magenta, and the EDIT VALUE label displays above the Right Knob
(
Figure 4-73
).
4. Rotate the Right Knob to select DISABLE (
Figure 4-74
).
5. Press the MENU Button to exit.
4.4.7. CDI Selected Course
1
When the CDI source changes from a GPS source with AUTOCRS to another CDI source, the CRS value reverts to the last set value. When the CDI source is set to a VHF receiver operating in the VOR or Localizer modes, editing the CRS value adjusts the current selected CRS value. When the CDI source is set to a GPS receiver, and AUTOCRS is disabled, the CRS value may be adjusted.
Select CDI Course
1. Press the Left Knob.
The CRS label above the Left Knob and the Course field are enabled for editing, both rendered in magenta (
Figure 4-75
).
2. Rotate the Left Knob to change the value of the Course field.
Once the CRS value is set, and after 10 seconds of inaction, the CRS field is disabled, and both the label and field are rendered in cyan.
091-00005-001 REV F
Figure 4-72
Menu, GENERAL SETTINGS
Figure 4-73
Editing AUTOCRS
Figure 4-74
AUTOCRS Disabled
Figure 4-75
CRS Field Enabled for Editing
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
Page 4-39
Figure 4-76
Bearing Pointer Description
NOTE
Distance to waypoint < 100 NM, display is in tenths of a mile, i.e., ##.#.
Distance to waypoint is 100 – 9999 NM, display in whole miles, i.e., ####.
Distance to waypoint is > 9999 NM, display is dashed, i.e., ----.
4.4.8. Bearing Pointer Source Selection
1
When the 360° Compass mode is selected, single- and double-line bearing pointers are available (
Figure 4-76
). The bearing pointers are independent of the CDI and provide supplemental navigation information by pointing to active GPS waypoints or navaids.
By default, the bearing pointers are off and not displayed.
Single-Line Bearing Pointer
Single-Line Bearing Pointer Source Information
Top Line Distance (NM) to active GPS waypoint
Bottom Line
Waypoint identifier, station identifier (when available, or the tuned frequency of the associated VHF NAV radio (when available)
Single-Line Bearing Pointer Icon
Double-Line Bearing Pointer
Double-Line Bearing Pointer Source Information
Top Line
Bottom Line
Distance (NM) to active GPS waypoint
Waypoint identifier, station identifier (when available), or the tuned frequency of the associated VHF NAV radio (when available)
Double-Line Bearing Pointer Source
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
Page 4-40
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
The Bearing Pointers indicate only the bearing information provided by their selected navigation sources. They resemble and perform like traditional Radio Magnetic Indicator
(RMI) needles. Each Bearing Pointer’s head and tail is aligned with the corresponding bearing/radial value on the compass. The pilot can select a navigation source for each of the Bearing Pointers from the same VOR and GPS sources available to the CDI or simply turn off the Bearing Pointer and Source Information.
Each Bearing Pointer is associated with a Left Button or a Right Button, its source, and
Information Block. The Left Button, immediately adjacent to the CDI Navigation Source
Selection Button (Middle Button), is associated with and controls the Single-Line
Bearing Pointer. Likewise, the Right Button controls the Double-Line Bearing Pointer.
The Bearing Pointers’ Source Information is shown directly above their respective
Buttons.
Unlike the CDI’s Course Pointer, which can be adjusted by the pilot, no adjustments can be made to the Bearing Pointers. When a VOR is selected as the source, the arrow of the needle points to the VOR navaid to which the receiver is tuned. The position of the
Bearing Pointer tail, with respect to the compass, indicates the aircraft’s current position on the VOR radial. When a GPS source is selected, the Bearing Pointer indicates the bearing to the active waypoint.
When the Bearing Pointer Source Information is unavailable or invalid, the Bearing
Pointer and its Source Information are removed (
Figure 4-77
). The Bearing Pointer’s
Source is also source legend slashed with a red line (
Figure 4-78
).
When a Bearing Pointer is turned OFF, only the Bearing Pointer’s icon is shown.
The Selected Source, the Source Information, and the Bearing Pointer are removed
(
Figure 4-79
).
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 4-77
Bearing Pointers OFF
Figure 4-78
Invalid Bearing Pointer Source
Figure 4-79
Icons when Bearing Pointers are OFF
Page 4-41
NOTE
A VOR that is tuned to a localizer frequency is considered an invalid Bearing Pointer source since
Localizer signals provide no bearing information.
Select the Single-Line Bearing Pointer Source
1. Press the Single-Line Bearing Pointer Button (Left Button,
Figure 4-80
) until the desired navigation source is shown above the Button.
Select the Double-Line Bearing Pointer Source
1. Press the Double-Line Bearing Pointer Button (Right Button,
Figure 4-81
) until the desired navigation source is shown above the Button.
Page 4-42
Figure 4-80
Single-Line Bearing Pointer and Button
Figure 4-81
Double-Line Bearing Pointer and Button
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
4.4.9. Heading Bug
The PFD offers a pilot-selectable Heading Bug. The Heading Bug symbol is positioned on the compass scale according to the Selected Heading Field value (HDG) set by the pilot (
Figure 4-82
).
When the Selected HDG Field value is outside the visible compass scale range in the
ARC Compass mode, only a portion of the Heading Bug is shown at the edge of the compass arc, closest to the HDG value (
Figure 4-83
).
When selected for editing, the Heading Bug and the Selected HDG Field value are shown in magenta. Additionally, a dashed magenta line extends from the Ownship
Symbol to the Heading Bug, corresponding to the HDG value. When the Heading Bug is
SYNCed, the HDG value is set to the current heading.
Set Heading Bug
1. Press the Right Knob.
The HDG label above the Right Knob and the Selected Heading Field are enabled for editing, both rendered in magenta (
Figure 4-84
).
2. Rotate the Right Knob to change the value of the Selected Heading Field.
Once the HDG value is set, and after 10 seconds of inaction, the Selected HDG Field is disabled, and both the Right Knob State and the Selected Heading Field are displayed in cyan.
Figure 4-82
Heading Bug and Selected
Heading Field
Figure 4-83
Selected Heading Bug Outside of the ARC Compass Scale Range
Figure 4-84
Heading Selected to Edit
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 4-43
Figure 4-85
Direction of Flight
Numerical Display
Page 4-44
Figure 4-86
Direction Indicator Fail
Figure 4-87
Rate of Turn Indicator
(360° Compass Mode)
Figure 4-88
Rate of Turn Indicator
(ARC Compass Mode)
4.4.10. Aircraft Heading Display
The aircraft heading is displayed in degrees magnetic (
Figure 4-85
).
If the aircraft’s heading is unavailable or invalid, all heading and navigation information, including the CDI and bearing pointers (if previously displayed), is removed and replaced with a single red X covering the entire lower display area, along with the annunciation DIRECTION INDICATOR FAIL (
Figure 4-86
).
4.4.11. Rate of Turn Indicator
The Rate of Turn Indicator consists of a curved white line originating from the corresponding side of the aircraft heading (i.e., a left turn indication starts on the left side of the index mark) and extends in the direction of the turn along the outer radius of the compass scale. The turn rate indication is provided for every compass mode, 360°
(
Figure 4-87
) and ARC (
Figure 4-88
).
The Rate of Turn Indicator features tick marks for full and half-standard rate turns (a standard rate turn = 3° per second).
The Rate of Turn Indicator has a range of 0° – 6° per second. When the turn rate exceeds
6° per second, an arrowhead is added to the end of the tape to show that the rate of turn has exceeded the limits of the instrument.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
4.4.12. Basemap Overlays
The Basemap comprises symbols depicting the location of flight plan waypoints and legs, airports, VORs, DMEs, NDBs, and intersections. The Basemap is always oriented with magnetic heading up and centered so that the current aircraft position coincides with the aircraft’s Ownship Symbol. The current Basemap declutter level and range are shown on the lower left side of the display (
Figure 4-89
).
Basemap Symbols
Aircraft Ownship Symbol
Basemap Declutter Level
Basemap Range
When enabled, the Basemap features on the Navigation Display are displayed and layered as detailed in
Table 5-12
. The GPS flight plan is rendered in either straight or curved lines, as supported by the configured GPS navigator. The displayed symbol set includes active waypoints, active flight plan leg, flight plan waypoints, flight plan legs, airports, VORs, VORTACs, TACANs, DMEs, intersections, and NDBs (
Figure 4-90
).
NOTE
All map and flight plan elements are received from the GPS and are only available from compatible GPS navigators (e.g. GNS 430/530).
091-00005-001 REV F
NOTE
A VORTAC is shown as a combined
VOR and DME symbol. A TACAN is rendered as a DME symbol.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 4-90
Basemap Symbol Set
Figure 4-89
Basemap (ARC CDI Compass Mode Shown)
Page 4-45
Figure 4-91
MAP Hot Key
4.4.12.1. Basemap Declutter and Range
To turn the Basemap on or off, the pilot selects one of the declutter levels as described in
Section 5.2
. The default map declutter level is Level 4. The map range corresponds to the outside radius of the compass scale, 2, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 60, 80, 100, or 200 nautical miles from the aircraft Ownship Symbol. The default range is 15nm. Both the map declutter level and range are pilot-adjustable.
Select Map Declutter Level
1. Press the MENU Button and rotate the Right Knob to MAP SETTINGS page.
2. Press the DCLTR LVL Menu Key (
Figure 4-91
) and rotate the Right Knob to select the desired map declutter level.
3. Press the MENU Button to exit.
The new Basemap display level appears above the Left Knob (
Figure 4-92
).
Change Map Range
1. Press the Range Up (RNG +) or the Range Down (RNG -) Button (
Figure 4-93
).
until the desired range is displayed (
Figure 4-94
).
Figure 4-93
Basemap Range Buttons
NOTE
When connected to a GPS that does not provide compatible Basemap data, only OFF and FP ONLY declutter levels are available.
Page 4-46
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 4-92
New Basemap Display Level
Figure 4-94
New Basemap Range
091-00005-001 REV F
The PFD has an Auto Range feature that automatically scales the range (to the closest range setting) to fit the Aircraft Ownship and the active waypoint within the Navigation
Display, e.g., if the active waypoint is 84 miles away, Auto Range will select a 100nm range (the closest range setting is 100nm). When Auto Range is active, an inverse white
A is shown next to the range value (
Figure 4-95
).
Enable Auto Range
1. Press the MENU Button.
2. Rotate the Right Knob to the GENERAL SETTINGS B Menu page.
3. Press the AUTO RNG Menu Key.
The AUTO RNG label turns magenta (
Figure 4-96
).
4. Rotate the Right Knob to the desired value, either ENABLE or DISABLE.
5. Press the MENU Button to exit.
Activate Auto Range
1. Press the RNG +/- button to select the highest or lowest map range.
2. Release and then press and hold the RNG +/- button for two seconds.
The map range changes and the new map range is indicated on the map. An inverse white A displays next to the numeric range value.
Deactivate Auto Range
1. Press the RNG +/- Button once to deactivate Auto Range mode.
The inverse white A next to the numeric range value is removed.
Pressing RNG + moves to the next higher range; pressing RNG - moves to the next lower range.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 4-95
Auto Range Mode
NOTE
The map range increases or decreases one increment each time the RNG + or - Button is pressed. Press and hold to continuously increase or decrease the range.
NOTE
Figure 4-96
GENERAL SETTINGS B Page Editing
Auto Range Setting
The Basemap declutter setting can determine what is displayed for a particular range. Refer to
Chapter 5,
Table 5-9
for more information.
Page 4-47
Figure 4-97
GPS1 Failure, Reversionary Navigation
Figure 4-98
RSM GPS Reversionary Navigation
Page 4-48
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
Auto Range is only available when a flight plan is active. Since Auto Range uses the distance between the present position and the next active waypoint to compute the appropriate map range, if the currently Selected CDI Navigation Source does not have a valid flight plan, then Auto Range is not selectable. If Auto Range cannot be selected check:
• To ensure a flight plan is active
• The GPS source with the flight plan is the Selected CDI Navigation Source
• That Auto Range is enabled from the General Settings B Menu page
4.4.12.2. Flight Plan
1
When a flight plan is provided by a configured GPS, the map shows flight plan waypoints and legs. The active leg and waypoint and associated identifier are displayed in magenta. Other waypoints and legs are white. Straight and curved flight plan details are rotated within the map display to maintain their correct relative orientations at all times.
4.4.12.3. Map Data Source and Reversion
1
If the selected GPS data is unavailable or invalid:
• The associated flight plan and map data are retained and displayed, as long as an alternate source of position information remains available.
• The flight plan and waypoints become inactive and are displayed in white.
• Position is provided from:
1. Another configured GPS source if providing valid position data. In this case, a
GPS# REVERSION annunciation is shown above the Selected CDI Navigation
Source (
Figure 4-97
) (# indicates the configured GPS source that is now providing the aircraft’s position, either 1 or 2).
2. The RSM GPS, if enabled, and position data are available. In this case, a RSM
GPS REVERSION EMER USE ONLY annunciation is shown above the Selected
CDI Navigation Source (
Figure 4-98
).
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
When a GPS source’s position data are invalid or no longer available, an amber annunciation, GPS1, GPS2, or RSM GPS, is shown in the lower left corner of the
Navigation Display to indicate which has failed (
Figure 4-99
).
4.4.13.
Ground Track Marker
1
When configured with a GPS that provides ground track data, a Ground Track Marker is displayed on the compass scale to indicate the aircraft’s ground track. This marker may be used to compensate for wind drift during flight (
Figures 4-100 and 4-101
). The Ground
Track Marker is removed from the display when ground track data is not available or invalid.
4.4.14. GPS OBS Operation with a PFD and a Mechanical
Standby Nav Indicator
1
When the PFD and a mechanical standby Nav indicator are both connected to an integrated
VOR/Localizer/GPS Navigation system, the standby indicator and the PFD operate normally in all VOR, GPS and localizer modes.
When the GPS OBS mode is selected, the PFD Selected Course (CRS) control commands the
GPS OBS course and the mechanical standby nav indicator’s OBS course selector is ignored by the integrated navigation system. Deviation indications are shown on both displays.
When the PFD is turned off, the course selector on the mechanical standby Nav indicator commands the GPS OBS value.
4.4.15. Course Pointer Operation with Integrated VOR/
Localizer/GPS Navigation Systems
1
During manual or automatic operation of the integrated system, when transitioning from
GPS guidance to VOR or localizer guidance, the course pointer on the should manually be set to the appropriate course.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
Figure 4-99
Invalid or Failed GPS Annunciations
Figure 4-100
ARC Compass Mode, Ground Track Marker
Figure 4-101
360° Compass Mode, Ground Track Marker
Page 4-49
Figure 4-102
Lateral and Vertical Deviation Indicators and Source Information
Page 4-50
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
4.5. Lateral and Vertical Deviation Indicator
1
In addition to the CDI in the Navigation Display, separate displays of lateral and vertical deviation information are shown in the Attitude Display during instrument approaches.
A Lateral Deviation Indicator (LDI) and a Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) (
Figure
4-102
) will automatically appear, depending on the operating mode of the selected navigation sensor and the validity of the associated signal, as described below.
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
Lateral Deviation Indicator (LDI)
LDI Navigation Source Annunciation
4.5.1. Lateral Deviation Indicator
1
The LDI and corresponding LDI Navigation Source Annunciation automatically display when:
• The active navigation source is a GPS radio, GPS is in the Approach mode, and the signal is valid.
Or
• The active navigation source is a VHF navigation radio and a valid LOC, LOC(BC), or
ILS signal is received.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
When the LOC(BC) mode is active, deviation indications (corrected for reverse sensing) are displayed. The deviation shown on the LDI directly corresponds to the deviation indicated on the CDI in the Navigation Display. When the lateral deviation exceeds the displayable range of 2.5 dots, the Course Deviation Diamond becomes dim and hollow, and is parked at the extreme edge of the LDI scale (
Figure 4-103
).
When the LDI navigation source is invalid or is no longer available, the Lateral Deviation
Diamond is removed from view, and the Navigation Source Annunciation is slashed by a red horizontal line (
Figure 4-104
).
4.5.2. Vertical Deviation Indicator
1
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) is enabled and is shown on the Attitude Display when the active navigation source is a VHF navigation radio, the ILS mode is active, and a valid localizer signal is being received. The VDI is also displayed for a GPS, supplying valid vertical deviation data, when in the Approach mode.
The VDI will only display with a valid vertical guidance signal. When the vertical deviation exceeds the displayable range, the Glide Slope Deviation Diamond becomes dim and hollow, and is parked at the extreme edge of the VDI scale (
Figure 4-105
).
091-00005-001 REV F
Figure 4-103
Lateral Deviation Diamond
Off Scale Indication
Figure 4-104
LDI Source Invalid
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
Figure 4-105
Vertical Deviation Diamond Off Scale Indication
Page 4-51
Figure 4-106
VSI
Figure 4-107
VSI Tape Off-Scale
4.6. Vertical Speed Indicator
When the 360° Compass Mode is selected, the Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) is rendered on the right side of the Navigation Display, showing a numerical and graphical representations of vertical speed. The VSI shows the change in pressure altitude over time. The graphical display is a white VSI Tape, with the numerical value at the top
(
Figure 4-106
). In either ARC Compass mode, only the numerical value is shown.
The VSI Tape displays rates of ±2,000 FPM while the numerical value displays rates up to
±9,990 FPM. When the vertical speed exceeds ±2,000 FPM, a triangle caps the VSI Tape
(
Figure 4-107
).
The VSI Tape is nonlinear, giving more display area to the 0 to ±1,000 FPM range than to the ±1,000 to ±2,000 FPM range. Tick marks are presented only in the direction of the climb or descent to provide visual cues for trends. The VSI’s numerical value, tape, and scale are only shown if the aircraft is climbing or descending more than ±100 FPM.
During level flight in calm air conditions, the Tape, scale, and zero reference line are removed from the display. The numerical value is always enabled and shows dashes when vertical rates are out of range. If vertical speed is invalid, the Tape and numerical display are replaced with a red X and the annunciation, VSI FAIL (
Figure 4-108
).
Figure 4-108
VSI Fail – 360° Compass Mode
Page 4-52
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
4.7. Autopilot Integration
1
The Pro PFD can connect with many different legacy autopilot systems that are typically found in general aviation aircraft. The PFD emulates the HSI and/or Flight Director (FD) with which the autopilot was originally certified. Autopilot integration is limited to heading and navigation modes, including vertical approach modes.
When connected to an autopilot system that includes Nav or Approach couplers, the
PFD also acts as the navigation source selector switch to the autopilot. This assures that the navigation information selected for the PFD is the same as that being provided to the autopilot. This arrangement also eliminates the need for external autopilot navigation source selector switches and relays that were previously used to select which navigation radio would be connected to the autopilot. Selection of autopilot modes and mode control is unaffected by the installation of the PFD.
The PFD does not currently provide vertical coupling to barometric references, such as altitude hold, vertical speed, or altitude capture.
See
Section 4.7.3. Typical Autopilot Operation
for more details on PFD operation with the autopilot systems during typical aircraft operations, such as VOR/ILS/GPS approaches.
NOTE
Refer to the autopilot AFMS for information on the operation of the autopilot or Flight Director.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
Page 4-53
WARNING
GPS Steering is a powerful automation tool that can substantially reduce pilot workload. However, using GPSS safely and effectively requires a thorough understanding of your specific aircraft installation and the interaction between the PFD, your GPS navigator, and your autopilot. Pilot actions required to use
GPSS safely can vary significantly depending on the autopilot and GPS navigator installed, especially when used on instrument approaches, especially those with vertical guidance.
It is imperative that pilots new to GPSS gain experience with it in VFR conditions and, ideally, get dual instruction from a CFII who thoroughly understands
GPSS and the autopilot and GPS navigator in your airplane before using GPSS on instrument procedures in IMC.
4.7.1. GPS Steering (GPSS)
1
GPS Steering represents a modern approach to flying between flight plan waypoints, and offers many advantages of over traditional methods of flying direct course lines between waypoints.
With traditional point-to-point navigation, the autopilot is provided with desired course and cross-track deviation information associated with the current flight leg. From there, it will maneuver the aircraft to center the needle and track the desired course. The autopilot does not anticipate upcoming course changes, nor can it fly curved flight paths without pilot assistance, and it has to recompute wind corrections following each course change. Upon reaching a waypoint, the pilot must set the course for the next leg (unless AUTOCRS is enabled,
see
Section 4.4.6. Auto Course
), and the autopilot will then intercept and track that leg. In this type of operation, the CDI must always be set to the desired course.
With GPSS, the PFD can unlock the GPS Steering capability already available in many models of general aviation GPS navigators. With GPSS, the navigator continuously computes the desired bank angle to track the GPS flight plan, and outputs that information over a digital data bus. The GPS Steering command anticipates upcoming turns; this includes the turn rate and turn initiation point required to roll out centered on the next leg.
Some GPS navigators, such as the Garmin 4xx/5xxW series of WAAS navigators, even provide GPS Steering commands for complex procedures, such as DME arcs, holding patterns, and procedure turns allowing the autopilot to fly these maneuvers without pilot intervention. Check with your GPS manufacturer to see if your GPS supports these capabilities.
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
Page 4-54
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
The PFD translates GPS Steering commands received over a digital data bus into a signal that is compatible with the autopilot Heading channel. Thus, by selecting GPSS on the PFD and the Heading mode of the autopilot, the autopilot is able to fly GPSS commands.
If the connected GPS does not provide the required steering commands, the GPSS legend adjacent to the GPSS Hot Key will be rendered in gray, and it will not be possible to enable GPSS with the Hot Key.
Enable/Disable GPSS
1. Press the GPSS Hot Key to alternately enable or disable GPS Steering
(
Figure 4-109
).
NOTE
Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement for your
GPS for information about GPSS commands that may be output by that system.
NOTE
When GPSS is selected on the PFD, the autopilot must be in Heading mode to follow the GPSS commands.
NOTE
When GPSS is disabled, the autopilot will follow the
Heading Bug.
091-00005-001 REV F
Figure 4-109
GPSS Hot Key
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 4-55
Page 4-56
Figure 4-110
GPSS Enabled with Autopilot in
HDG Mode
Figure 4-111
GPSS Disabled and Autopilot in
HDG Mode
When GPSS is enabled, and the autopilot is in HDG mode, the autopilot will follow the steering commands from the GPS. A GPSS enabled state will be indicated on the PFD in two locations: 1) the GPSS legend adjacent to the GPSS Hot Key will be shown in inverse green; and 2) the annunciation GPSS1 (or GPSS2, depending on the selected source), along with an inverse A, will be shown next to the HDG reference at the top of the Navigation Display, to the right of the Magnetic heading indication (
Figure 4-110
).
When GPSS is disabled, and the autopilot is in HDG mode, the autopilot will follow the
PFD Heading Bug. A GPSS disabled state will be indicated on the PFD in two locations:
1) the GPSS legend adjacent to the GPSS Hot Key will be shown in gray; and 2) the
Selected Heading Field will return. (
Figure 4-111
).
When the PFD Basemap navigation source is GPS1, enabling GPSS with the autopilot in HDG mode will cause the autopilot to track the flight plan in GPS1, and GPSS1 will be annunciated by the HDG reference at the top of the Navigation Display. Similarly, when GPS2 is the Basemap navigation source on the PFD, and GPSS is enabled, the autopilot in HDG mode will track the GPS2 flight plan, and GPSS2 will be annunciated at the top of the navigation display.
See
Section 4.4.5
for additional information on the relationship among the CDI navigation source, Basemap navigation sources, and GPSS navigation source.
When using GPSS with a stand-alone VLOC receiver, or with a combined GPS/VLOC navigator (e.g., the GNS-430/530), GPSS will continue to follow the GPS output of that combined navigator, even when VLOC is selected as the PFD Selected CDI Navigation
Source. With combined GPS/VLOC receivers, the transition from GPS to VLOC may occur automatically, depending on how that system has been configured by the pilot.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
For example, suppose you use a GNS-430 to fly a GPS flight plan and have an ILS instrument approach loaded and active, and the GNS-430 is set for Auto ILS CDI changeover once you are established inbound on the final approach course. With GPSS enabled on the PFD and the autopilot in HDG mode, the GPSS will steer the autopilot laterally through the flight plan using GPS, even after the GNS-430 CDI automatically switches to VLOC, and the PFD navigation source similarly switches to VLOC. However, until you switch the autopilot into the Approach mode, it will not arm or capture the glideslope to fly the ILS approach. This feature is particularly useful for autopilots that do not automatically transition from Heading mode to Nav mode when the selected course is intercepted.
When flying an ILS on a WAAS GNS-430W, the autopilot in HDG mode can use the GPSS to fly the full course reversal automatically, and the GNS-430W will automatically switch to VLOC once established inbound to the Final Approach Fix. But the pilot must then engage the Approach mode on the autopilot to track the localizer and couple to the glideslope.
Several conditions can cause GPSS to be disabled automatically (switching to a different
GPS steering source on the PFD, losing the GPS navigator source, canceling the flight plan, etc.). If this happens, the PFD will send a Wings Level command to the autopilot when in HDG mode, the GPSS Hot Key will annunciate the condition by showing
GPSS in inverse amber, and the GPSS# and inverse A annunciation at the top of the
Navigation Display will be shown with a red slash. (
See
Figure 4-112
). To re-engage
GPSS, select a valid GPS navigation source (with valid flight plan or direct-to selection on the GPS navigator), and then press the GPSS Hot Key. If a valid GPSS signal cannot be restored, pressing the GPSS Hot Key will cancel GPSS mode and restore the Heading
Bug’s output to the autopilot. More detail on these abnormal conditions, and corrective pilot actions, can be found in
Chapter 6, Expanded Emergency and Abnormal
Procedures
.
See
also
Chapter 4, Section 4.7.3. Typical Autopilot Operations.
NOTE
Refer to the autopilot systems Aircraft Flight Manual
Supplement and/or POH for details regarding use and operation of the autopilot system.
Examples here are provided for reference only, based on operation of the Bendix/King KFC-200 autopilot, and actual operation may vary depending on the autopilot system installed in your aircraft.
WARNING
It is your responsibility as Pilot in Command to ensure that you are familiar with the operation of all installed equipment. Operation of the PFD in IMC conditions should not be attempted unless you are proficient in its use and operation, as described herein.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 4-57
Figure 4-112
GPSS Automatically
Disabled — Wings Level Mode
4.7.2. Flight Director
1
When connected to a compatible autopilot system, the PFD will display a single-cue
Flight Director (FD). The FD’s command bars visually represent the lateral and vertical steering cues transmitted to the PFD by the autopilot (
Figure 4-113
). When the FD output from the autopilot is unavailable or invalid, the FD command bars are removed from the display. To hand fly using the FD, maneuver the airplane to tuck the Aircraft
Reference Symbol into the FD’s command bars.
4.7.3. Typical Autopilot Operations
1
Whenever the PFD’s installed configuration includes connections to GPS, VLOC, and autopilot systems, it acts as a data conduit between the navigators and the autopilot.
This enables any compatible navigator to be coupled to the autopilot.
Figure 4-113
Flight Director
NOTE
With the autopilot in HDG mode, if GPSS is automatically disabled, the autopilot will roll wings level; it will not follow the Heading Bug.
Page 4-58
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
HDG Mode Operation – Heading Bug Steering
1. Set the PFD Heading Bug to the desired heading (
Section 4.4.9
).
2. Verify that GPSS is not selected.
3. Select the autopilot’s Heading (HDG) mode.
4. Engage the autopilot and verify that the autopilot turns the aircraft to the selected heading.
HDG Mode Operation – GPS Steering (GPSS)
1. Couple the PFD CDI to a GPS navigation source with an active flight plan.
2. Enable GPSS by pressing the GPSS Hot Key.
3. Select the autopilot’s Heading (HDG) mode.
4. Engage the autopilot and verify that the autopilot turns the aircraft to follow the GPS flight plan.
NAV Mode Operation – VLOC Navigation
1. Using the CDI Source Select button, couple a tuned/valid VLOC radio to the
PFD CDI and adjust the Course Pointer (CRS) to a value that will intercept the course.
2. Set the PFD Heading Bug
3. Engage the autopilot in Heading (HDG) mode and verify that the aircraft turns to the desired heading.
4. If your autopilot supports automatic Heading to Navigation mode transitions, arm Navigation capture on the autopilot by selecting its Navigation (NAV) mode. Otherwise, select the autopilot’s Navigation (NAV) mode when the autopilot’s navigation signal capture criteria are satisfied (see your autopilot
AFMS for more information).
5. Monitor the PFD CDI deflection and verify that, upon intercepting the desired course, the autopilot modes transition appropriately and the autopilot tracks the desired course.
NOTE
When GPSS is enabled, the HSI Heading Bug is not coupled to the autopilot. To connect the Heading Bug to the autopilot, disable GPSS with the GPSS Hot Key.
NOTE
The autopilot must be in Heading (HDG) Mode to receive GPSS signals from the PFD.
NOTE
When using an integrated GPS/VLOC navigator, select
VLOC or GPS with the CDI source button on the GPS select until the desired CDI Navigation Source is shown on the PFD (See
Section 4.4.5.
)
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 4-59
NOTE
Not all autopilots operate in the manner described here for intercepting courses. See the AFMS for your autopilot installation to understand how to adapt these example procedures to your particular autopilot.
NOTE
In order for the autopilot to couple to vertical guidance on GPS WAAS approaches, most autopilots must first be established on the final approach course and in the
Altitude (ALT) Hold mode at least two miles outside the
Final Approach Fix (FAF). The Approach (APPR) mode must be annunciated on both the PFD and the GPS.
NAV Mode Operation – GPS Navigation
1. With a valid flight plan programmed and active in the GPS, use the CDI
Source Select button to couple the GPS to the PFD (
see
Section 4.4.5.
).
2. If AUTOCRS is disabled, set the Course Pointer to the desired course (CRS) (
see
Section 4.4.7.
), or enable AUTOCRS (
see
Section 4.4.6.
).
3. With GPSS disabled, set the PFD Heading Bug (
see
Section 4.4.9.
) to a value that will intercept the active leg of the flight plan, or enable GPSS via the
GPSS Hot Key.
4. Engage the autopilot in Heading (HDG) mode and verify that the aircraft turns to a heading to intercept the active leg of the flight plan.
5. If your autopilot supports automatic heading to nav mode transitions, arm the navigation capture on the autopilot by selecting its Navigation (NAV) mode. Otherwise, select the autopilot Navigation (NAV) mode when the autopilot navigation signal capture criteria are satisfied (see your autopilot
AFMS for more information).
6. Monitor the PFD CDI deflection and verify that, upon intercepting the flight plan leg, the autopilot modes transition appropriately and the autopilot tracks the desired course.
Page 4-60
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
APPR Mode Operation – ILS Approach with Vectors to Final
1. Using the CDI Source Select button, couple a tuned/valid ILS radio frequency to the PFD CDI, and adjust the course (CRS) (
Section 4.4.7
).
2. Set the PFD Heading Bug to a value that will intercept the desired course, or as instructed by ATC (
Section 4.4.9
).
3. Engage the autopilot in Heading (HDG) and Altitude (ALT) Hold modes and verify that the aircraft turns to the desired heading.
4. Once cleared for the ILS approach, arm the autopilot’s Approach (APPR) mode, or continue to fly Heading (HDG) mode until the CDI centers.
5. Monitor the CDI’s deflection and verify (if supported by your autopilot) that, upon intercepting the localizer, the autopilot switches to Approach (APPR) capture, and tracks the localizer course. Otherwise, engage the autopilot
Navigation or Approach mode per the procedures in your autopilot’s AFMS.
6. Monitor the autopilot localizer tracking performance. Upon intercepting the glide slope, verify that the autopilot captures the Glide Slope (GS) and initiates a descent to track the glide slope.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 4-61
NOTE
WAAS GPS navigators can provide vertical guidance on several types of GPS/RNAV instrument approaches.
RNAV (GPS) APV (Approaches with Vertical Guidance), such as LPV and LNAV/VNAV approaches, often have lower approach minima shown on the approach plate. Aircraft equipped with appropriate WAAS GPS equipment may use these lower minima.
Even with more traditional lateral guidance- only
GPS/RNAV approaches (e.g. (LNAV) with step-down altitudes) WAAS GPS may still provide a pseudo-glide slope that enables a continuous descent to the MDA
(Minimum Descent Altitude). The autopilot may consider this a glide slope and attempt to fly it. For this type of instrument approach, the vertical guidance is advisory only and the MDA is the appropriate approach minimum.
These types of approaches are set up and flown the same way, much like an ILS approach. The pilot must be aware of the differences and which minima to use.
Page 4-62
APPR Mode Operation – GPS or GPS/RNAV APV WAAS Approach
1. With a valid GPS approach programmed in the GPS, use the CDI Source Select
Button to couple the GPS to the PFD (
see
Section 4.4.5.
).
2. If AUTOCRS is disabled, set the Course Pointer to the desired course (
see
Section
4.4.7.
), or enable AUTOCRS (
see
Section 4.4.7.
).
3. With GPSS disabled, set the PFD Heading Bug to a value that will intercept the active leg of the flight plan (
see
Section 4.4.9.
) or enable GPSS via GPSS Hot Key.
4. Engage the autopilot in Heading (HDG) mode and verify that the aircraft turns to a heading to intercept the active leg of the approach.
5. For autopilots that do not support automatic heading mode to Navigation (NAV) or Approach (APPR) mode transitions, use the Heading Bug to establish the aircraft inbound to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) and then engage the autopilot’s Approach
(APPR) mode.
6. For autopilots that support automatic Heading (HDG) to Approach (APPR) mode transitions, monitor the PFD CDI and verify that, upon intercepting the active leg of the approach, the autopilot turns to track the GPS approach course guidance.
THE FOLLOWING APPLY FOR WAAS GPS/RNAV APV APPROACHES ONLY
7. Once cleared for the GPS/RNAV approach, select the autopilot’s Approach (APPR) mode.
8. Monitor the PFD CDI and verify that the autopilot intercepts and tracks the final approach course and the GPS switches to its Approach mode.
9. Most WAAS GPS navigators will not arm or activate vertical guidance until the aircraft is within two miles of the FAF (unlike an ILS where the VDI will display as soon as the aircraft is established on the final approach course and a valid localizer signal with glide slope signal is received). As you approach the FAF, watch for the
VDI to appear on the PFD Attitude Display. This indicates that the autopilot is ready to capture the glide slope.
10. Monitor the autopilot lateral approach course tracking with the PFD CDI and LDI.
Upon intercepting the WAAS GPS glide slope, verify that the autopilot switches captures the glide slope and starts a descent.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
GPS APPR Mode Operation – WAAS GPS Underlay to ILS Approach
Using Pilot Navigation and GPSS
1. With a valid ILS approach loaded and activated in the GPS, use the CDI
Source Select button to couple the GPS to the PFD CDI (
see
Section
4.4.5.
).
2. Verify that the correct ILS frequency is tuned.
3. When the active flight plan leg is the course to the Initial Approach Fix
(IAF), enable GPSS via the GPSS Hot Key.
4. Engage the autopilot in Heading (HDG) and Altitude (ALT) Hold modes and verify that the aircraft continues to fly the course to the IAF.
5. Monitor the PFD CDI and aircraft track to ensure the aircraft flies to the IAF and then turns outbound for the course reversal.
6. A WAAS GPS navigator provides guidance along curved flight paths, and will guide the aircraft through the course reversal and establish it inbound to the FAF without pilot intervention.
7. Once established on the final approach course to the FAF, engage the autopilot’s Approach (APPR) mode.
8. Use the PFD CDI Source Select button to change to the VLOC for the approach (if not done automatically by the GPS/nav receiver).
9. Monitor the PFD CDI localizer deflection and verify that, upon intercepting the localizer, the autopilot captures the final approach course and switches to the Approach (APPR) mode.
10. Monitor the autopilot localizer tracking performance. Upon intercepting the glide slope, verify that the autopilot captures glide slope and initiates a descent.
NOTE
The PFD supports GPS LPV approaches (Approaches with Vertical Guidance) by providing the autopilot with GPS lateral and vertical deviation signals that are identical to those typically provided by an ILS radio.
To fly GPS LPV approaches, configure and operate the autopilot as you would for an ILS approach.
NOTE
Some IFR GPS navigators include ILS approaches in their procedures database. GPS may be used to navigate the initial segments of the ILS approach, but the pilot must switch to VLOC navigation outside the
FAF and before glide slope intercept.
Some integrated GPS/NAV receivers (like the
Garmin 4xx/5xx series) can be configured to switch automatically, and the PFD Selected CDI Navigation
Source will follow automatically. It is the pilot’s responsibility to verify that the PFD CDI source is correctly set to VLOC# before reaching either glide slope intercept or the FAF..
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 4-63
Page 4-64
GPS APPR Mode Operation – WAAS GPS Underlay to ILS Approach With ATC
Vectors to Final
1. With a valid ILS approach loaded and activated in the GPS, use the CDI Source
Select Button to couple the PFD GPS to the CDI (
see
Section 4.4.5.
).
2. Verify that the correct ILS frequency is tuned.
3. Set the Heading Bug to the heading assigned by ATC (
see
Section 4.4.9.
).
4. Disable GPSS via the GPSS Hot Key.
5. Engage the autopilot in Heading (HDG) mode and verify that the aircraft turns to the Selected Heading.
6. When cleared for the approach and given the final heading to intercept the final approach course by ATC, arm the autopilot’s Approach (APPR) and
Altitude (ALT) Hold modes.
7. Monitor the CDI and aircraft track to verify that the autopilot intercepts the final approach course and begins to track inbound to the FAF.
8. Use the PFD CDI Navigation Source Select Button to change to the
VLOC source for the approach (if not done automatically by the GPS/nav receiver).
9. Monitor the PFD CDI localizer deflection and verify that, upon intercepting the localizer, the autopilot captures the final approach course and switches to the Approach (APPR) mode.
10. Monitor the autopilot localizer tracking performance. Upon intercepting the glide slope, verify that the autopilot captures the glide slope and initiates a descent to.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
4.8. Hazard Awareness
1, 2
Evolution Hazard Awareness (EHA) offers three hazard awareness options;
• Lightning (Data Link Weather and Stormscope® WX-500)
• NEXRAD
• Traffic
Each option requires additional sensors. For Data Link Lightning and NEXRAD, an additional subscription to XM WX Satellite Weather is required. Each hazard awareness option is accessed by a Hot Key and displayed on the Navigation Display (
Figure
4-114
).
4.8.1. Lightning Overlay
1
The LTNG Hot Key is a three position Hot Key (LTNG, STRK, and CELL) that permits display of satellite lightning information or Stormscope® WX-500 data overlaid on the
HSI.
When enabled, the lightning displays as described in
Table 4-5
. The LTNG Hot Key label is inverse green (green label and dark blue letters) when enabled or a blue label and green letters when disabled.
091-00005-001 REV F
Figure 4-114
Navigation Display Showing
Hazard Awareness
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
2. When the PFD is configured with an ADS-B radio refer to Aspen document
091-00057-001, ADS-B Pilot’s Guide Supplement..
Page 4-65
NOTE
WX-500 Lightning Symbols and rate annunciation are removed from the Basemap for ranges less than 20nm.
Hot
Key
Display
Symbol
LTNG
Figure 4-115
Data Link Lightning
Symbol
Annunciation Description
Figure 4-116 Lightning Time
Annunciation displays in the lower left corner of the Navigation Display showing the age of received data.
Data Link Lightning Symbols display as cyan lighting symbols at full intensity for 5 minutes after information is received.
Symbols are positioned on the display relative to the Ownship
Symbol.
After 5 minutes, the symbols will fade over the next 15 minutes.
Figure 4-121
WX-500 Data is Not Available
NOTE
WX-500 data will not display, and the rate annunciation displays with a red line when the
Stormscope receiver reports a fault or error, aircraft heading is invalid or unavailable, or WX-500 data is not detected
(
Figure 4-121
)
.
Page 4-66
STRK
Figure 4-117
WX-500 Strike Symbol
Figure 4-118 WX-500 Strike Rate
Annunciation displays in the lower left corner of the Navigation Display showing the current strike rate.
Symbols are positioned on the display relative to the Ownship
Symbol.
CELL
Figure 4-119
WX-500 Cell Symbol
Figure 4-120 WX-500 Cell Rate
Annunciation displays in the lower left corner of the Navigation Display showing the current cell rate.
Symbols are positioned on the display relative to the Ownship
Symbol.
Table 4-5
Lighting Display
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Display Lightning
1. Select the 2/2 Hot Key Menu.
2. Press the LTNG Hot Key to select the desired option.
The LTNG Hot Key label turns inverse green when enabled. Each press of the Hot Key cycles through the available options; LTNG, STRK, CELL, or LTNG disabled. (STRK is selected in
Figure 4-122
).
4.8.2. Data Link Weather Overlay
1, 2
The NXRD Hot Key enables the display of NEXRAD (Next Generation Radar) and precipitation data overlaid on the Navigation Display relative to the Ownship Symbol.
The Hot Key label is green when enabled and gray when disabled. The Data Link
Weather default setting is off. NEXRAD coverage includes:
• U.S. and Puerto Rico NEXRAD
• U.S. Precipitation type
• Canada Radar
• U.S. NEXRAD Coverage
• Canada Coverage
Display Data Link Weather
1. Select the 2/2 Hot Key Menu.
2. Press the NXRD Hot Key to enable Data Link Weather
The NXRD Hot Key label turns inverse green when enabled (
Figure 4-123
).
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 4-122
Lightning Overlay Enabled
Displaying WX-500 Strike Data
Figure 4-123
Data Link Weather Enabled
NOTE
When Strike or Cell mode is displayed, pressing and holding the CELL or STRK Hot Key will reset the respective RATE to zero and remove all stormscope symbols from the display. This function may also be performed from the MENU.
NOTE
When US and Puerto Rico NEXRAD and Canada Radar exceeds the specified expiration time, the depiction for the respective radar is rendered as no Radar Coverage.
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
2. When the PFD is configured with an ADS-B radio refer to Aspen document
091-00057-001, ADS-B Pilot’s Guide Supplement..
Page 4-67
NOTE
Areas of no coverage are gray. If the aircraft is on the ground before data is received, or in an area of no coverage and the range setting is low, the entire HSI may be underplayed in translucent gray.
Figure 4-124
NEXRAD Radar Data
NEXRAD coverage displays using the following methodology:
• If US Precipitation Type is unavailable and US NEXRAD Radar is available, the US weather depiction is displayed as rain.
• If US Precipitation Type is available and US NEXRAD Radar is unavailable, the US weather depiction is not displayed.
• If US coverage is unavailable or expired and US NEXRAD is available, the US weather depiction is displayed as if all US radar sites are valid.
• If Canada coverage is unavailable and Canada radar is available, the Canada weather depiction is displayed as if all US radar sites are valid.
• If US NEXRAD Radar or Canada Radar exceed the specified expiration time, the depiction for the respective radar is displayed as no Radar Coverage.
• If Puerto Rico NEXRAD Radar exceeds the specified expiration time, the Puerto Rico
NEXRAD Radar depiction for the respective radar displays as no Radar Coverage.
• Radar data is displayed as outlined in
Figure 4-124
. Areas without radar coverage are indicated by translucent gray. Radar cells indicating reflectivity below 10 dBZ are not displayed. The PFD offers a Data Link Weather legend accessible from the
MENU.
Display Data Link Weather Legend
1. Press the MENU Button.
2. Rotate the Right Knob to the XM RECEIVER C Menu page.
3. Press and hold the HOLD FOR LGND Menu Key.
The Data Link Weather Legend displays until the Menu Key is released (
Figure 4-125
).
4. Press the MENU Button to exit.
Figure 4-125
Data Link Weather Legend
Page 4-68
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
When the Data Link Weather is enabled, an age annunciation is shown in the lower left corner of the Navigation Display (
Figure 4-126
). The age annunciation indicates the elapsed time in minutes since the information was generated. Each weather product has an age limit and is usually updated at the update frequency indicated in
Table 4-6
.
The age of each weather product is displayed in XM RECEIVER B and XM RECEIVER C
Menu pages (
Figure 4-126
).
Weather Product
U.S. NEXRAD
Expiration Time (min.) Update Frequency (min.)
30 5
30 5 Puerto Rico NEXRAD
High Resolution
(Canada) Radar
U.S. Radar Coverage
Canada Radar Coverage
Precipitation Type
30
30
30
30
10
5
10
5
Data Link Lightning 30 5
Table 4-6
Weather Product Age Limits and Update Frequency
View Data Link Weather Age
1. Press the MENU Button.
2. Rotate the Right Knob to the XM RECEIVER B Menu page.
The age of each Data Link Weather product is shown (
Figure 4-126
).
3. Press the MENU Button to exit.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 4-126
Data Link Weather Product Age
Page 4-69
Page 4-70
The data age (except Puerto Rico NEXRAD) will display in Amber whenever the data link receiver has failed or stops reporting. When the expiration time has been reached and no updates have been received, the age annunciation is shown with a red slash and all data are removed from the Navigation Display.
Table 4-7
describes the age annunciations.
Age Annunciation Conditions
NEXRAD data is being received and updated.
The data link receiver has failed or the data are unavailable, but not expired and may still be valid. Check local weather conditions.
NEXRAD data are removed and the age annunciation is slashed with a red line, for any of the following conditions:
• The age of the data exceeds the expiration time identified in
Table 4-6
; additionally, the corresponding
NEXRAD data are removed from the display.
• The data age of all displayed products exceeds the specified expiration time.
• No valid data have not yet been received for 15 minutes.
• GPS position information is unavailable or invalid.
Valid data has not yet been received from the NEXRAD receiver after the PFD is turned on.
Table 4-7
Weather Age Annunciations
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
4.8.3. Traffic Overlay
1, 2
The TRFC Hot Key enables the traffic display overlaid on the Navigation Display when the PFD is configured with one of the following traffic sensors:
• Avidyne TAS 600/610/620 (TAS)
• Bendix/King KMH 880 (TAS)
• Bendix/King KTA 870 (TAS)
• Garmin GTX 330 (TIS)
• RYAN 9900BX (TAS)
• SKYWATCH SKY 497 (TAS)
• SKYWATCH SKY 899 (TAS)
The TRFC Hot Key enables the Traffic Overlay and the selection of a Traffic Altitude Filter.
The Hot Key Label is inverse green (green label with dark blue letters) when enabled
(
Figure 4-127
) or a blue label with green letters when disabled.
When the Traffic Overlay is enabled, a TRFC annunciation is presented on the lower left of the Navigation Display. The traffic setting that was previously reset over a power cycle is retained as last configured by the pilot.
Display the Traffic Overlay
1. Select the 2/2 Hot Key Menu.
2. Press the TRFC Hot Key to select the desired Altitude Filter.
Figure 4-127
Traffic Overlay Enabled
NOTE
Because of their importance, the PFD will show Traffic
Advisories on the Navigation Display even when Traffic
Overlay is disabled.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
2. When the PFD is configured with an ADS-B radio refer to Aspen document
091-00057-001, ADS-B Pilot’s Guide Supplement.
Page 4-71
Traffic Advisory
Other Traffic
Proximity
Advisory
Figure 4-128
Traffic Symbology
NOTE
Refer to your traffic sensor’s Pilot Guide for detailed information about the sensor limitations and operational ranges.
Additionally, see the Aeronautical Information
Manual section entitled Traffic Information Service
(TIS) for detailed information about TIS requirements, capabilities and limitations..
4.8.3.1. Traffic Symbols
1
The PFD will display traffic symbols prioritized in the order received from the configured traffic sensor. The PFD includes three threat levels using TCAS symbology;
Traffic Advisory (amber circle), Proximity Advisory (cyan diamond), and Other Traffic
(hollow cyan diamond). All traffic symbols within the current display range and the selected altitude filter are shown relative to the Ownship Symbol (
Figure 4-128
).
The Traffic Advisory System (TAS) use an airborne interrogator with a half-second update rate; coverage follows the aircraft. The Traffic Information Service (TIS) system use a GTX 330 transponder with a five-second update rate; coverage is limited to specific areas listed in the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM).
WARNING
Do not rely on the PFD as the sole source of data for collision avoidance. It is the pilot’s responsibility to visually acquire other aircraft for safe flight. Maneuver your aircraft based only on ATC guidance or positive acquisition of conflicting traffic. Traffic information is:
• Provided as a proximity warning only
• Intended to assist the pilot in the visual acquisition of other aircraft
• Not intended to provide recommended avoidance maneuvers
• Not provided for aircraft that are not transponder equipped, experiencing a transponder failure, or out of radar coverage
Page 4-72
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
The PFD displays traffic information from the sensor with the threat level assigned by the sensor. The sensor and type of traffic system defines the threat data, range, bearing, altitude, and altitude trend. Each traffic symbol is positioned at a location representing the relative range and bearing to the Ownship Symbol.
A data block is provided for each traffic symbol with the relative altitude and vertical direction (as acquired from the sensor). The data block text color is the same as the traffic symbol, amber for Traffic Advisories and cyan for Proximity Advisories and Other
Traffic (
Figure 4-129
).
The relative altitude is shown as two digits indicating the relative altitude difference, in hundreds of feet, from your aircraft. The altitude value for traffic above the ownship is preceded by a plus symbol (+) and is displayed under the symbol. The altitude value for traffic below the ownship is preceded by a minus symbol (-) and is displayed under the symbol.
An arrow next to the traffic symbol gives the direction of vertical movement in relation to the your aircraft. Traffic climbing or descending at a rate greater than 500 fpm are given an up-arrow (climbing), or down-arrow (descending) to the right of the traffic symbol. Traffic that is at the same altitude, with no vertical trend, is given an altitude value of 00 below the traffic symbol.
For example, the Traffic Advisory shown in
Figure 4-128
is 400 feet above your aircraft and descending. No altitude information is shown in the data block when the altitude is unavailable.
Traffic Advisories that are outside the current range are indicated by a half-symbol at the edge of the Navigation Display with the appropriate data block. Proximity Advisories and Other Traffic that are outside of the current range are not displayed.
When multiple traffic symbols partially or completely overlap, the symbols are visually stacked, with the highest priority alert data on top, obscuring the lower priority alert.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
NOTE
Traffic that is within 100 feet of the ownship shown an altitude value of 00, above or below the traffic symbol as appropriate.
NOTE
When the traffic is flying level, no arrow is shown.
When the traffic is not reporting an altitude, neither the arrow nor the altitude indication is shown.
NOTE
Figure 4-129
Traffic Symbol Data Block
Depending on the position of the Traffic Advisory at the edge of the screen, the traffic symbol data block may or may not display.
Page 4-73
NOTE
The altitude filters listed in Table 4-8 are referenced to your aircraft and the PFD altitudes. The traffic sensor configured with the PFD may have different (i.e., lower) altitude thresholds. Check your traffic sensor pilot’s manual for specifics.
Figure 4-130
Traffic Altitude Filter
When a traffic symbol and the Ownship Symbol partially or completely overlap, the traffic symbol and data block will overlay the ownship symbol.
4.8.3.2. Traffic Altitude Filter
1
There are five Altitude Filters available: Off, Normal, Unrestricted, Above, and Below
(
Table 4-6
). Only traffic within the selected altitude filter value will display.
Hot Key Label
TRFC
TFCN
TFCU
TFCA
TFCB
Table 4-8
Traffic Filter Parameters
Altitude Filter Level
Off
Normal
Unrestricted
Above
Below
Traffic Display Volume
None
±2,700 ft
±9,900 ft
+9,900 ft to -2,700 ft
+2,700 ft to -9,000 ft
The pilot adjusts the altitude filter value by continuously pressing the TRFC Hot Key, which cycles through each of the filter levels.
Change the Traffic Altitude Filter
1. Select the 2/2 Hot Key Menu
2. Press the TRFC Hot Key to select the desired filter level.
The TRFC annunciation displays in the lower left of the display (
Figure 4-117
).
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
Page 4-74
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
4.8.3.3. Traffic Unavailable
1
When the TAS (Traffic Advisory System) sensor’s status is STANDBY, TEST or FAIL:
• an Invalid Traffic Sensor annunciation (
Figure 4-131
) is displayed and the Traffic symbols are removed from view
When the traffic interface is a TIS (Traffic Information Service) and the Traffic data is:
• Unavailable – TRFC UNVL is annunciated
• Not refreshed within 6 seconds – TRFC COAST is annunciated
• Not refreshed within 12 seconds – TRFC RMVD is annunciated and the Traffic symbols are removed from view
• Not refreshed for 60 seconds – TRFC RMVD annunciation is removed from view
091-00005-001 REV F
Figure 4-131
Traffic Sensor Invalid
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
Page 4-75
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 4-76
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Page PB
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Chapter 5
Customizing the PFD
5.1. Menu Overview
The following tables and figures provide a brief overview of each menu page and its menu options.
OPTIONS KEY DESCRIPTION
Displays Airspeed and
Altitude Tapes
1
DISABLE or ENABLE
Radio Altitude
2
DISABLE or ENABLE
Auto Course Select 2
ARC Compass Mode
2
DISABLE or ENABLE
HSI or CDI
AHRS Reset Action
Table 5-1
Menu – GENERAL SETTINGS A
1. Available only in those installations where an additional airspeed indicator and altimeter are added or retained within the pilot’s maximum field of view.
2. Not available with the Pilot PFD
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 5-1
GENERAL SETTINGS A
Page 5-1
Figure 5-2
GENERAL SETTINGS B
Page 5-2
KEY DESCRIPTION OPTIONS
Barometer Pressure Setting Units of Measure in Hg or mB
Outside Air Temperature Units of Measure °C or °F
Clear WX-500 Strike/Cell Count
1, 2
WX-500 Strike Test
1, 2
Auto Range
Table 5-2
Menu – GENERAL SETTINGS B
1. Pro PFD Only when configured with Stormscope® WX-500.
2. Not available with the Pilot PFD
Action
Action
DISABLE or ENABLE
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 5-3
Page 5-2
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
KEY DESCRIPTION
MACH Display
Overspeed Warning Test
Table 5-3
Menu – GENERAL SETTINGS C
OPTIONS
ALTITUDE:
OFF, ON>5K, ON>6K, ON>7K,
ON>8K, ON>9K, ON>10K,
ON>11K, ON>12K, ON>13K,
ON>14K, ON>15K, ON>16K,
ON>17K, ON>18K
SPEED:
OFF, ON>0.1, ON>0.2, ON>0.3,
ON>0.4, ON>0.5, ON>0.6, ON>0.7
Action
091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 5-3
GENERAL SETTINGS C
Page 5-3
Figure 5-4
360° MAP SETTINGS
Page 5-4
KEY DESCRIPTION
360° Declutter Level
360° Flight Plan
360° Airports
360° VORs (High, Low and Terminal)
360° Intersections / NDB
Table 5-4
Menu – 360° MAP SETTINGS
OPTIONS
0, 1, 2, 3, 4
OFF, AUTO
OFF, AUTO
OFF, AUTO
OFF, AUTO
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 5-5
Page 5-4
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
KEY DESCRIPTION
ARC Declutter Level
ARC Flight Plan
ARC Airports
ARC VORs (High, Low and Terminal)
ARC Intersections / NDB
Table 5-5
Menu – ARC MAP SETTINGS
OPTIONS
0, 1, 2, 3, 4
OFF, AUTO
OFF, AUTO
OFF, AUTO
OFF, AUTO
091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 5-5
ARC MAP SETTINGS
Page 5-5
Page 5-6
Figure 5-6
VSPEEDS A
KEY DESCRIPTION OPTIONS
VSPEEDS DISABLE or ENABLE
Va
Vr
Table 5-6
Menu – VSPEEDS A
Vbg
Vref
0 to 450 or LOCKED
0 to 450 or LOCKED
0 to 450 or LOCKED
0 to 450 or LOCKED
KEY DESCRIPTION OPTIONS
Vx 0 to 450 or LOCKED
Vy 0 to 450 or LOCKED
Vlo 0 to 450 or LOCKED
Vle
Table 5-7
Menu – VSPEEDS B
0 to 450 or LOCKED
Figure 5-7
VSPEEDS B
NOTE
When V Speeds are LOCKED at installation, the legend and set value are shown in gray.
Setting any of the above values to zero removes the affected V Speed.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 5-7
Page 5-6
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
KEY DESCRIPTION
XM Serial Number 1, 2
XM Receiver Signal Quality 1, 2
XM Status
1, 2
Table 5-8
Menu – XM RECEIVER A
1. Pro PFD Only when configured with an EWR50 Weather
Receiver and a subscription to XM WX Satellite Weather®.
2. Not available with the Pilot PFD
OPTIONS
Status Only
Status Only
Status Only
091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 5-8
XM RECEIVER A
Page 5-7
Figure 5-9
XM RECEIVER B
Page 5-8
KEY DESCRIPTION
US NEXRAD Age
1, 2
Puerto Rico NEXRAD Age
1, 2
Lightning Age
1, 2
Precipitation Age 1, 2
US Coverage Age
1, 2
Table 5-9
Menu – XM RECEIVER B
1. Pro PFD Only when configured with an EWR50 Weather
Receiver and a subscription to XM WX Satellite Weather®.
2. Not available with the Pilot PFD
OPTIONS
Status Only
Status Only
Status Only
Status Only
Status Only
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 5-9
Page 5-8
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
KEY DESCRIPTION
Canada Radar Age 1, 2
Canada Coverage Age
1, 2
Display Weather Legend
1, 2
Table 5-10
Menu – XM RECEIVER C
1. Pro PFD Only when configured with an EWR50 Weather
Receiver and a subscription to XM WX Satellite Weather®.
2. Not available with the Pilot PFD
OPTIONS
Status Only
Status Only
Action
091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 5-10
XM RECEIVER C
Page 5-9
Figure 5-11
POWER SETTINGS
NOTE
For external/battery power control, the legend of the current power source is shown in green; pressing the associated menu key will perform no action. The legend of an available power source is shown in white, and pressing the associated menu key changes input power to that power source.
Page 5-10
KEY DESCRIPTION
Operating from or Switch to Battery Power. Green when current state (Pressing key performs no action). White if selection is possible.
Operating from or Switch to External Power. Green when current state (Pressing key performs no action). White if selection is possible.
OPTIONS
Status or Action
Status or Action
Restart (Depending on Air/Ground Logic State).
Action
External Power Source Voltage. Displays voltage level of input power.
Status Only
Battery Status Description
##%
CHARGING
FAILED
READY
Displays battery % charge.
The battery has sufficient voltage and can accept charging, aircraft power is available, and the temperature sensor is within limits
(0°C to +55°C).
The battery voltage is less than 6 volts; i.e. insufficient for charging.
The connected battery and battery voltage are satisfactory, but the temperature limits (0°C to +55°C) that will permit charging have been exceeded.
Table 5-11
Menu – POWER SETTINGS
Status Only
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 5-11
Page 5-10
KEY DESCRIPTION
Main Application Processor Software Version
Input Output Processor Software Version
Unit Serial Number
Table 5-12
Menu – SYSTEM STATUS
OPTIONS
Status Only
Status Only
Status Only
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 5-12
SYSTEM STATUS
Page 5-11
Figure 5-12
360° Compass Mode Display Options
Figure 5-13
ARC Compass Mode Display Options
Page 5-12
5.2. Customizing Basemap Symbol Declutter Settings
The pilot can customize the Basemap symbol declutter settings to Level 4, Level 3,
Level 2, Level 1, or Level 0 (OFF) by pressing the MENU Button and selecting the 360
MAP SETTINGS Menu page or the ARC MAP SETTINGS Menu page.
Each Compass Mode has its own Menu page for Map Setting basemap symbol display.
• The 360 MAP SETTINGS Menu page offers Map Setting options for the 360°
Compass Mode (
Figure 5-12
).
• The ARC MAP SETTINGS Menu page offers Map Setting options for the ARC
Compass Mode (
Figure 5-13
).
As described in
Table 5-9
, the selected declutter level and range determine which
Basemap symbols are displayed. Basemap symbol identifiers may also be shown next to their symbol.
See
Chapter 4, Section 4.4.1.
for more details about Compass Mode options
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 5-13
Page 5-12
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Set Map Symbol Display
1. Press the MENU Button.
2. Rotate the Right Knob to navigate to the appropriate Map Settings Menu page.
3. Press the desired Map Symbol Menu Key.
The menu label turns magenta, and the EDIT VALUE label displays above the
Right Knob (
Figure 5-14
and
5-15
).
4. Rotate the Right Knob to the desired value.
5. Select another Map Symbol Menu Key and edit the display option or press the MENU Button to exit.
091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F
Figure 5-14
Editing 360° NDB Display Option
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 5-15
360° NDB Display Option Set To OFF
Page 5-13
Feature Group and Layer Order
(from Top to Bottom)
Max Range Declutter Setting
Traffic Overlay Symbols
Ownship Symbol
Page 5-14
1
2
Instruments
1
and Annunciations
2
3
Flight Plan Legs and Waypoints
3
Airports 3
NDBs
3
VORs, (HIGH, LOW, Terminal)
3
Intersections
WX-500 or Data Link Lightning
4
7
8
5
6
9
NEXRAD Weather
Table 5-12
Map Feature Group Layering, Range, and Declutter Levels
10
Overlay – enabled via Hot Key
Figure 5-16 Level 4 Figure 5-17 Level 3
Always ON, regardless of declutter level
Figure 5-18 Level 2
Always ON, regardless of declutter level
Always ON, regardless of declutter level
200
100
15
200
15
Overlay – enabled via Hot Key
Overlay – enabled via Hot Key
Always ON
Always ON
4
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 5-19 Level 1 Figure 5-20 Level 0 (Off)
No symbols, legs, or waypoints — regardless of selected range — are displayed.
When selected, the basemap declutter and range display for two seconds and then are removed from view. The MAP
Hot Key legend is shown in gray.
1. e.g., VSI, Direction Indicator, CDI, TO/FROM.
2. e.g., NAV INFO Block, Range.
3. Shown only when data is provided by a compatible and connected GPS system.
4. Removed at ranges less than 20nm.
091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 5-15
Page 5-14
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Va
Vbg
Vr
Vref
Vx
Vy
Vle
5.3. Configuring Vspeeds
Vspeeds are used to designate different operating speeds of the aircraft and are defined in
Table 5-13
.
Vspeed
Vne
DEFINITION PRE-SET
BANDS
ADJUSTABLE
TEXT LABELS
PRE-SET
MARKERS
(Red Line)
Vno
Vfe
Vs
Vso
Never exceed
Maximum structural cruising speed
Maximum full flap extension speed
No flap stall
Stall speed in landing configuration
Design maneuvering speed
Best glide
Rotation speed
Landing reference speed
Best angle of climb
Best rate of climb
Maximum landing gear extended speed
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 5-15
NOTE
Setting the value of the white triangle, Vyse, and Vmc markers to zero (0) during installation disables the markers. Setting any of the adjustable Vspeed values to zero (0) disables the associated label.
Vspeed DEFINITION
Vlo
Vmc
Vyse
Table 5-13
Vspeed Definitions
Maximum landing gear operating speed
(Multi-engine) Single-engine minimum control airspeed
(Multi-engine) Best single-engine rate of climb
Maximum initial flap extension speed
PRE-SET
BANDS
ADJUSTABLE
TEXT LABELS
PRE-SET
MARKERS
(Red Line)
(Blue Line)
Page 5-16
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 5-17
Page 5-16
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
The PFD uses color speed bands, color speed markers, and textual labels to help the pilot recall Vspeed settings and limits. The speed band markings are determined by the
Federal Regulations and correspond to the aircraft operating speeds that are identified in the Aircraft Flight Manual. They have a range between two speeds that are pre-set at installation as outlined in
Table 5-14
and shown in
Figure 5-21
.
Speed markers are also pre-set during installation, indicating important aircraft-specific speeds, where applicable. The textual Vspeed labels are made pilot adjustable or locked during the PFD installation.
BAND COLOR SPEED RANGE
Red Band (High Speed) Vne (Top of tape)
Yellow Band
Green Band
Vno – Vne
Vs – Vno
White Band Vs0 – Vfe
Red Band (Low Speed) Vs0 (Bottom of tape)
Table 5-14
Speed Band Ranges
Never Exceed
Caution Range
Normal Operating Range
Flap Operating Range
Disabled on the ground and during takeoff
NOTE
The color speed bands and color speed markers on the PFD Airspeed Tape are configured to match the certified mechanical airspeed indicator.
Figure 5-21
Speed Bands
NOTE
On aircraft without flaps, the white band is disabled, and the green band is shown full width, as there isn’t an applicable Flap Extend (Vfe) or Full Flap Stall (Vs0) speed. These two speeds are set to the same speed as the No Flap Stall (Vs) speed. This gives the white band a value of zero, effectively disabling it.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 5-17
Figure 5-22
VSPEEDS A
Figure 5-23
Editing VSPEEDS
On aircraft with flaps, setting the upper and lower thresholds of the white and/or yellow bands to the same value disables the applicable band. When disabled, the band does not display.
When using the Vspeed textual markers, the pilot must first ENABLE the display of the markers and then set values for each Vspeed. The value range for Vspeed textual markers is 0 – 450 or LOCKED. The default setting is 0 unless previously set to another value. When the value is 0, the Vspeed is individually disabled, and the marker is not shown on the Airspeed Tape. Once the values are set, the pilot can choose to disable all the Vspeed textual markers to declutter the Airspeed Tape.
Display or Hide the Vspeed Textual Markers on the Airspeed Tape
1. Press the MENU Button.
2. Rotate the Right Knob to the VSPEEDS A Menu page (
Figure 5-22
).
3. Press the VSPEEDS Menu Key.
The Menu label turns magenta, and the EDIT VALUE label displays above the
Right Knob (
Figure 5-23
).
4. Rotate the Right Knob to select ENABLE or DISABLE (
Figure 5-24
).
ENABLE will display the Vspeeds on the Airspeed Tape and DISABLE will hide the Vspeeds to declutter the Airspeed Tape
5. Press the MENU Button to exit.
Page 5-18
Figure 5-24
VSPEEDS Disabled
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 5-19
Page 5-18
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Set Textual Vspeed Labels
1. Press the MENU Button.
2. Rotate the Right Knob to the appropriate Vspeed Menu page (
Figure 5-25
).
3. Press the appropriate Vspeed Menu Key.
The Menu label turns magenta, and the EDIT VALUE label displays above the
Right Knob (
Figure 5-26
).
4. Rotate the Right Knob to the desired value (
Figure 5-27
).
5. Select another Menu Key to edit another Vspeed or press the MENU Button to exit.
Figure 5-25
VSPEEDS A
091-00005-001 REV F
NOTE
A typical installation sets the Airspeed Textual Markers to UNLOCKED, allowing the pilot to edit the indicated Vspeed labels. If the Vspeed setting was LOCKED during installation, no pilot adjustment is allowed.
091-00005-001 REV F
Figure 5-26
Editing Va Vspeed
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 5-27
Va Vspeed Set With New Value
Page 5-19
Figure 5-28
Display Brightness in BRT AUTO Mode
Figure 5-29
Display Brightness in BRT ADJUST Mode
NOTE
When the PFD is operating on the internal battery, the maximum brightness level is capped at 40% in automatic mode and 70% in manual mode to preserve battery operating time.
5.4. LCD Brightness Control
The LCD brightness of the PFD operates in either of two modes, Automatic or Manual
(
Figures 5-28
and
5-29
). The LCD brightness range is displayed as a value from 1–100, displayed above the Left Knob.
LCD MODE
AUTOMATIC
BRT AUTO
DESCRIPTION
LCD backlight intensity is automatically adjusted based on the ambient lighting conditions sensed by the Automatic Dimming Photocell (
Figure
5-28
). When using the auto-brightness, the maximum brightness level is
70%.
Allows the pilot to adjust the LCD backlight intensity. (
Figure 5-29
) from
1–100%.
MANUAL
BRT ADJUST
Table 5-15
Brightness Control
Change Brightness Mode
1. Press the MENU Button.
2. Press the Left Knob to select the desired LCD Brightness Control mode, either
Automatic (BRT AUTO) (
Figure 5-28
), or Manual (BRT ADJUST) (
Figure 5-29
).
3. Press the MENU Button to exit.
NOTE
To facilitate cooling of the PFD display unit, when the backlight temperature is greater than or equal to
70°C, the display brightness level is limited to 30% in automatic mode and 70% in manual mode. The limits are removed when the PFD display temperature drops below 60°C.
Page 5-20
Adjust Display Brightness Manually
1. Switch to manual LCD Brightness Control mode (BRT ADJUST) (
Figure 5-29
).
2. Rotate the Left Knob clockwise to increase the display brightness or counterclockwise to decrease the display brightness. The BRT: value changes accordingly.
3. Press the MENU Button to exit and retain the selected brightness level.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page PB
Page PB
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Chapter 6
Expanded Emergency and Abnormal
Procedures
This section supplements and provides an expanded description of the emergency and abnormal procedures included in the FAA-approved
Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement. The information provided here is intended to provide additional background information to enhance the pilot’s understanding of the emergency and abnormal conditions and the associated procedures provided in the AFMS. This pilot guide is provided for supplementary purposes only. The approved cockpit reference for in-flight use is the AFMS. Both the Pilot Guide and the
AFMS must be immediately available to the pilot at all times in flight. In the event of any conflict between this document and the FAA-approved
AFMS, the AFMS instructions must be followed.
091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 6-1
Page 6-2
6.1. Pitot/Static System Blockage
A pitot line blockage will result in the airspeed indicator behaving like an altimeter when the aircraft’s altitude changes, and it will not respond to airspeed changes. A pitot line blockage can also affect the PFD’s attitude indication.
A static line blockage will result in altitude remaining fixed and a zero vertical speed despite aircraft pitch and/or power setting changes. In addition, IAS indications will be incorrect if the static line is blocked. Errors will typically be noticed during climbs or descents. When descending, ambient pressure increases which will result in the indicated airspeed reading more than the actual airspeed. The opposite effect will be observed in a climb. A static line blockage can also affect the PFD’s attitude indication.
Indication of an obstructed pitot system is provided for PFD when the PFD’s indicated airspeed is less than 30 KIAS (35 mph) and GPS ground speed is greater than 50 kts (58 mph), then attitude and heading instruments are replaced with red Xs and textual annunciations to indicate their failure. In this case, an amber CHECK PITOT
HEAT annunciation accompanies the ATTITUDE FAIL annunciation. When the pitot obstruction is subsequently removed and indicated airspeed ≥ 30 KIAS (35 mph), the
CHECK PITOT HEAT annunciation will be removed in 15 seconds. This indicates that the PFD is performing an automatic AHRS reset in the background. No pilot action is required to reset the system.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 6-3
Page 6-2
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Blocked Pitot or Static Line Suspected
1. Turn Pitot heat ON
2. Open the Alternate Static Source
3. Refer to alternate attitude, airspeed, altitude, and heading sources for primary flight information
4. Consider exiting IMC
5. Land as soon as practicable
CAUTION
Most light aircraft have only a single pitot and static port available for flight instrument use. As such, the pitot and static lines used by the PFD are shared with those lines used by the standby airspeed indicator and altimeter. Should these lines become blocked, such as might occur due to an inadvertent icing encounter, the PFD, the standby airspeed indicators and the altimeters will display erroneous information.
Because the PFD uses pitot and static pressures as part of the ADAHRS solution, loss or corruption of this data, such as from a line blockage, will affect the attitude and heading information.
Whenever an erroneous pitot input is detected by the PFD inflight, it will replace the affected instruments with red Function Fail Xs and display a CHECK PITOT HEAT annunciation. In this case, the pilot should check pitot heat, select the aircraft’s alternate static source and refer to secondary sources of attitude, airspeed, and heading information.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 6-3
Page 6-4
6.1.1. Identifying and Handling Suspected Pitot and/or
Static System Failures
Blocked pitot and/or static system ports will compromise the PFD’s attitude solution and soon cause it to Red-X (fail). Immediately begin flying by reference to backup attitude sources. Therefore, the pilot must be especially vigilant about verifying proper operation of the pitot and static systems both before and during flight.
It is important to check the pitot tube and static system ports, and to verify pitot heater performance, as part of a thorough pre-flight inspection, especially when anticipating flight in low IMC.
On takeoff roll, it is good practice to note and call out “airspeeds alive” when the airspeed indicators (both primary and backup) begin moving and to compare and call out readings at a pre-determined airspeed close to, but before rotation speed (e.g.
“60 knots cross check”), consciously noting the performance on each takeoff. If the airspeed indicators do not come “alive” when they usually do or whenever there is a significant difference between the primary and backup indicators and sufficient runway is remaining, aborting the takeoff may be a prudent decision. Follow the Flight Manual procedures for your aircraft.
When the static port is blocked on takeoff, it is imperative to quickly recognize the condition. Sometimes the airspeed indicator will show substantially less than normal and the airspeed will reduce in the climb. The natural—but incorrect—response is to lower the nose. In this situation, maintaining proper pitch attitude to climb is vital. The airspeed will continue to reduce as you climb, and at about 1,000 feet AGL the PFD attitude and heading indications will be Red-X due to the reduced airspeed indication.
As soon as you suspect a blocked static port, try switching to an alternate static source.
Know the location of the alternate static air control in your airplane and learn how it works.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 6-5
Page 6-4
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
On the initial climb-out after takeoff, it is also good practice to note and call out passing through a pre-determined altitude above ground level (AGL) a couple of minutes after takeoff and ideally before entering the clouds (e.g., “2,000 feet”). If your primary and backup instruments are not showing the altitude and airspeed you normally expect to see at that point, you might have partially blocked static system ports. This AGL check and call-out is also a good time to verify that no fuel is siphoning out from the fuel caps, etc. If indications suggest a static system blockage, try switching to an alternate static air source and consider landing to correct the problem.
In flight, if airspeed or altitude anomalies consistent with an obstructed pitot or static line are observed, the pilot should recognize that the PFD’s attitude indication will soon be compromised. If in IMC, immediately use the backup attitude indicator to fly the airplane and turn pitot heat ON if icing is suspected. If at any time there is suspicion of an obstructed pitot or static line, use the backup attitude indicator until the situation is resolved.
If the pitot tube becomes blocked in flight, the most common cause is icing. In-flight indications of a blocked pitot tube are typically:
1) All airspeed indicators incorrectly show zero (or close to zero); or
2) Airspeed in level flight does not change in response to changes in power or drag and airspeed indications act like an altimeter (decreasing in a descent and increasing in a climb, exactly the opposite of normal behavior).
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 6-5
Page 6-6
Airspeed going to zero is by far the most common symptom of a blocked pitot tube.
If you see either of these indications of a blocked pitot tube, the first thing to do is turn on the pitot heat to remove any ice blockage. This will quickly restore the attitude and airspeed indications on the PFD systems (it takes about 40 seconds to recover after the pitot pressure is restored).
To maintain proper aircraft attitude during the event (and if the heated pitot does not work), use the outside horizon if possible, or use the backup attitude indicator to continue safe flight. The autopilot attitude source is also independent of the PFD’s attitude indicator and may be another means to maintain level flight. Use the autopilot carefully and constantly monitor its performance against other flight instruments.
If in flight you suspect blocked static ports (probably due to icing), try switching to the alternate static air source. If the static air sources are blocked, recognize that the readout from the transponder and reports from ATC will be in error because of the blocked static system.
If GPS altitude is available on your GPS navigator, become familiar with how the GPS altitude is displayed. Although it can be in error, it might be your only source of altitude information (WAAS GPS altitude is reasonably accurate).
If an instrument approach is necessary, consider a precision approach that will permit vertical guidance with less reliance on the barometric pressure altitude indications.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 6-7
Page 6-6
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
6.2. Frequent or Persistent CROSS CHECK
ATTITUDE Annunciation
Refer to alternate attitude, airspeed, altitude, and heading sources for primary flight information. Consider the following:
CROSS CHECK ATTITUDE
1. Reference standby mechanical attitude indicator.
2. Turn Pitot heat ON.
3. Consider exiting IMC.
4. Land as soon as practicable
For a detailed explanation of when and why the PFD may display a CROSS CHECK
ATTITUDE annunciation, either momentarily or persistently,
see
Chapter 4, Section 4.1.
Air Data, Attitude and Heading Reference System (ADAHRS)
.
6.3. Difference Detected Between the PFD and
Mechanical Attitude Indicators
Once diagnosed, ensure the correct attitude source is the only one referenced during the remainder of the flight.
Compare Alternate Sources of Available Attitude, Airspeed, and Attitude
1. Compare all available sources of attitude, airspeed, and attitude information to diagnose a faulty indicator.
2. Consider exiting IMC.
3. Land as soon as practicable .
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 6-7
Page 6-8
Figure 6-1
Powering Off the
PFD
6.4. Abnormal Shutdown Procedure
The PFD is typically powered through an PFD master switch that is connected to the aircraft’s Battery bus. Normally, the PFD will power down when the PFD Master switch is turned OFF or when aircraft power is removed when on the ground. To force the PFD to power down, the following procedures are provided.
Shutdown PFD (on ground)
1. PFD Master switch OFF
2. Press and hold the REV Button until the display turns off (
Figure 6-1
)
Or
1. Press the MENU Button.
2. Rotate the Right Knob to the POWER SETTINGS Menu page
3. Press the SHUT DOWN Menu Key. The power down sequence initiates, and a power down message displays
A powering off annunciation displays indicating that the unit will shut down in 5 seconds. The pilot can press any control to abort the power-down sequence.
Power On Manually
• Press and hold the REV Button until the PFD powers on.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 6-9
Page 6-8
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
6.5. Loss of Aircraft Electrical Power
In the event that aircraft generated power is degraded or fails, the PFD will automatically switch to its own dedicated battery (
Figure 6-2
). When continued safe operation depends on the PFD,
UNRESTORABLE LOSS OF EXTERNAL POWER IS AN
EMERGENCY SITUATION
. The aircraft should divert to the nearest suitable airport.
Loss of or Degraded Aircraft Power or ON BAT Annunciation
1. Electrical System .....................................................Follow AFM procedures to restore power
2. If unable to restore power ................................Land as soon as possible
The internal battery will normally provide between 30-60 minutes of operation at approximately 20°C and warmer. At extreme cold temperatures, operation of the internal battery is not assured.
When on battery the auto backlight intensity level defaults to 40% and manual backlight intensity is limited to 70%. Changing the backlight intensity will affect the battery duration, which is reflected in the % remaining indication.
A fully charged battery will indicate a charge level of 99% for some time before beginning to discharge. The charge level will steadily decrease when below 95%, with a slight acceleration as the battery nears 0%.
The “ON BAT” annunciation, along with the estimated battery charge remaining, is displayed whenever the system is operating on battery.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 6-2
Battery Charge Remaining
Page 6-9
NOTE
When operating on the internal battery, the display backlight intensity is limited to a value of 70.
NOTE
Setting the brightness to a value of greater than 40% will reduce the battery operation time to less than 30 minutes.
WARNING
When fully charged, the internal battery will power the PFD to provide ADAHRS and emergency RSM GPS position (if enabled) for approximately 30 minutes. When continued safe operation depends on the PFD’s primary flight data,
UNRESTORABLE LOSS OF
EXTERNAL POWER IS AN EMERGENCY SITUATION
. The pilot should follow the electrical failure checklist in the Aircraft Flight Manual land as soon as possible.
CAUTION
During situations where a high electrical demand is placed on the aircraft electrical system, electrical transients that cause aircraft voltage to drop below 9.0V momentarily or 12.3V for 2 minutes (14V electrical system) or 18.0V momentarily or 24.6V for 2 minutes
(28V electrical system) will cause the PFD display to automatically switch to its internal battery.
This will be accompanied by an ON BAT annunciation.
The ON BAT annunciation should extinguish shortly after the electric transient demand goes away. If the ON BAT annunciation does not extinguish, then an aircraft power source failure has most likely occurred.
Page 6-10
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 6-11
Page 6-10
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
6.5.1. Overvoltage Protection
In the event of an overvoltage condition in the aircraft’s electrical system, (greater than 33 volts) the PFD will automatically switch to its battery power and continue to operate without any pilot action. Operation from the aircraft electrical system will not be possible while the overvoltage condition is present. When aircraft power decreases below 33 volts, pilot action is required to manually switch from the PFD battery power.
Restore Aircraft Power to the PFD
1. Press the MENU Button and rotate the Right Knob to the POWER Settings page
2. Press the EXT PWR Menu Key
3. Press the MENU Button to exit
6.6. GPS Failures and RSM Emergency GPS Use
1
Position and flight plan data for the PFD is provided from aircraft panel-mounted GPS equipment. The PFD may be configured to receive data from one or two external GPS receivers. In addition, if all aircraft GPS receivers fail, the RSM’s emergency GPS receiver will provide position data if enabled by the installer.
The Basemap will follow an automatic position reversion scheme to determine which
GPS is used to provide position data to the map. The primary GPS is always the one selected by the pilot using CDI Navigation Source Select Button. If the selected GPS fails, the PFD automatically switches to the other aircraft’s GPS (if installed) and will annunciate GPS# REVERSION, where # represents the GPS source providing the position data (
Figure 6-22
).
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
Page 6-11
NOTE
When airborne, if the PFD’s input voltage is below the
12.8V (14V Electrical System) or 25.6V (28V Electrical
System) automatic battery transition threshold, and
EXT PWR is selected through the POWER SETTINGS
Menu, the PFD will automatically remain connected to its internal battery.
Figure 6-3
External Power Voltage Status
If all aircraft panel-mounted GPS receivers experience a failure, the RSM Emergency
GPS receiver will provide position data that is shared among all EFDs. In addition, a text alert is presented at the bottom center of the Navigation Display annunciating RSM
GPS REVERSION EMER USE ONLY (
Figure 6-23
). This “sharing” feature permits any EFD
(as configured by the installer), to receive and display the RSM GPS position data, thus assuring continuous navigational awareness to the pilot. In this case, the Basemap data is approved for emergency use only
Whenever the map has reverted to an alternate position source, all map features and capabilities are retained, including the display of the flight plan from the selected panelmount GPS. However, when the selected GPS is no longer providing position data, the flight plan is displayed without an active (magenta) leg. The flight plan and Basemap data from each of the aircraft’s GPS receivers is retained independently. If two external
GPSs were connected prior to failure of both, and if each had a different flight plan at the time of failure, both retained flight plans remain available to the pilot and may be selected using the PFD’s Navigation Source Select Button.
In the unlikely event that there is a complete loss of all GPS data to the EFD, including failure of the RSM GPS receiver, all mapping information would be removed from the
EFD display.
Figure 6-4
Battery Status
Page 6-12
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 6-13
Page 6-12
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
6.7. Power Override
In the event that the pilot wishes to override the PFD’s automatic power configuration, proceed as follows:
Power Override
1. MENU .............................................................................“POWER SETTINGS” Page
To switch FROM aircraft power to Internal Battery:
2. “BATTERY” LINE SELECT KEY ..............................PRESS
To switch FROM internal Battery TO aircraft power:
3. “EXT PWR” LINE SELECT KEY .............................PRESS
View External Voltage Status
1. Press the MENU Button.
2. Rotate the Right Knob to the POWER SETTINGS Menu displays.
3. The EXT PWR Menu Key (
Figure 6-3
) displays the external power voltage.
4. Press the MENU Button to exit.
View Internal Battery Status
1. Press the MENU Button.
2. Rotate the Right Knob to the POWER SETTINGS Menu displays.
3. The BAT Menu Key (
Figure 6-4
) displays the current Battery Status as either
Charging or a Percentage of Charge.
4. Press the MENU Button to exit.
NOTE
When airborne, if the PFD’s input voltage is below the
12.8V (14V Electrical System) or 25.6V (28V Electrical
System) automatic battery transition threshold, and
EXT PWR is selected through the POWER SETTINGS
Menu, the PFD will automatically remain connected to its internal battery.
Figure 6-3
External Power Voltage Status
Figure 6-4
Battery Status
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 6-13
Figure 6-5
Attitude Degraded Performance
6.8. In-Flight AHRS Reset
In the unlikely event the PFD determines a potential degradation of attitude information, a warning annunciation, CROSS CHECK ATTITUDE, is shown (
Figure 6-5
).
If the attitude pitch or roll data become invalid, a red X and the textual annunciation of ATTITUDE FAIL replaces the Attitude Indicator, and all aircraft roll, pitch, and slip information is removed from the Attitude Display (
Figure 6-6
). Use alternate, mechanical flight instruments for primary flight information and reset the PFD’s AHRS as soon as possible.
During the In-Flight AHRS Reset, the aircraft should not be subjected to excessive turn rates. Typical in-flight Resets will take approximately 30 seconds, but can take longer if the reset is initiated while banked or maneuvering.
Figure 6-6
Attitude Failure
NOTE
When the PFD’s AHRS is reset in flight, it performs an abbreviated initialization.
The AHRS Reset is considered complete when the PFD’s attitude and heading is once again displayed, stable, and correct with respect to the horizon or standby attitude indicator.
Page 6-14
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 6-15
Page 6-14
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Perform an In-Flight AHRS Reset
1. Maintain straight and level flight.
2. Consider exiting IMC.
3. Fly by visual reference or by standby instruments.
4. Disconnect the autopilot.
5. Press the MENU Button.
6 Rotate the Right Knob to display the GENERAL SETTINGS A Menu page.
7. Press the AHRS RESET? Menu Key (
Figure 6-7
).
A confirmation message displays, prompting the user to confirm the reset request (
Figure 6-8
).
8. Press the AHRS Menu Key again to confirm the AHRS reset. The AHRS reset is performed, and the confirmation messages clears.
9. Press the MENU Button to exit.
091-00005-001 REV F
Figure 6-7
AHRS Reset Menu Key
Figure 6-8
AHRS Reset Confirmation Message
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
NOTE
Pressing any other key, button, or knob cancels the
AHRS reset and clears the confirmation message.
Page 6-15
Figure 6-9
Operating in GPSS Mode
Figure 6-10
GPSS in Wings Level Mode
Page 6-16
6.9. GPSS Operation, Annunciations, and Autopilot
Modes
1
The Pro PFD offers GPSS. Three modes, Enabled, Wings Level, and Disabled, are possible and annunciated in the PFD’s Navigation Display. When enabled, the configured GPS source not only provides the Basemap and flight plan data, but also passes GPSS as the heading input to a configured autopilot. When engaged, a configured autopilot will interpret GPSS commands as heading inputs and follow the active GPS flight plan, including anticipated turns, if provided. The GPSS Enabled mode is indicated by a green
GPSS Hot Key label and a GPSS1 with an inverse A placed next to the Selected Heading
Field to describe the source (
Figure 6-9
) .
If GPSS is enabled and the GPS source is lost or changed, the GPSS mode automatically changes to the Wings Level mode and annunciates as shown in
Figure 6-10
.
NOTE
When using GPSS with combined GPS / VLOC navigators (e.g. GNS 430/530), VLOC may be selected as the navigation source while GPSS is engaged. To avoid confusion, note the PFD Selected CDI Navigation Source controls the CDI and the autopilot’s navigation and approach modes when engaged. GPSS reflects the heading commands required to navigate the active flight plan leg and controls the autopilot’s heading mode when engaged. Complete understanding of autopilot mode functions and their proper selection is recommended.
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 6-17
Page 6-16
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
The Wings Level mode removes roll steering inputs to the autopilot, causing the aircraft to roll wings level, and displays a red slash through the annunciated A HDG and
GPSS# source. The amber GPSS Hot Key label requires pilot action. If this occurs, do the following:
When GPSS Automatically Changes to Wings Level Mode
1. Check the configured GPS source.
2. Check the PFD Selected CDI Navigation Source.
3. If the selected GPSS source is restored or changed and GPSS is still desired, press the GPSS Hot Key to activate GPSS (The GPSS Hot Key label turns inverse green).
Disable GPSS
1. Adjust the PFD HDG bug as desired.
2. Check or set the Autopilot Control Panel modes as desired.
3. Press the GPSS Hot Key until the Hot Key label turns gray (
Figure 6-11
).
Figure 6-11
GPSS Disabled
NOTE
The configured GPS source must provide an active flight plan (or Direct-To waypoint) for
GPSS to remain engaged or to be restored.
When the PFD navigation source is changed to another configured GPS or VLOC source for longer than 2 seconds, the GPSS Enabled mode will change to Wings Level. The pilot must then press the GPSS Hot Key to restore or disable GPSS, as desired.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
NOTE
When the GPSS is enabled and the autopilot is engaged in the Heading (HDG) mode, disabling the
GPSS will cause the autopilot to follow the HDG Bug.
Page 6-17
6.10. Warning, Caution, and Advisory Summary
WARNINGS
Presented when the PFD is operating on the internal battery. The countdown timer begins at 15 seconds and is then replaced by the ON BAT annunciation with the battery’s % charge remaining.
Figure 6-12
Battery Countdown
Figure 6-13
Battery Charge Remaining
NOTE
If the battery temperature is less than 0° C, the countdown timer will begin at 10 minutes.
Presented when the PFD has determined that the associated function is invalid or failed and should not be used. The data is removed from the display and replaced by a red X over the affected display feature.
Figure 6-14
Attitude Fail
Figure 6-15
Direction Indicator Fail
Page 6-18
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 6-19
Page 6-18
WARNINGS
Figure 6-16
Chevrons indicate Pitch Down
Table 6-1
Warning Annunciations
Figure 6-17
Chevrons indicate Pitch Up
When the Attitude Indicator display extreme pitch up or extreme pitch down attitudes, the red chevrons indicate the direction to restore level flight.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 6-19
CAUTION
Figure 6-18
Cross Check Attitude
Figure 6-19
Check Pitot Heat
Page 6-20
Presented when the PFD AHRS internal integrity monitor determines that attitude is potentially degraded. When a CROSS CHECK ATTITUDE annunciation is presented, the pilot should cross check attitude, airspeed, and altitude indications with other sources of primary flight information.
The CHECK PITOT HEAT annunciation accompanies the ATTITUDE FAIL annunciation and is presented when the software detects an obstruction in the pitot system that could potentially degrade the attitude solution. This annunciation is removed when the detected condition is resolved, which would be followed by an automatic AHRS reset. A GPS is required for this monitor to be enabled.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 6-21
Page 6-20
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
CAUTION
Figure 6-20
GPS Invalid
Figure 6-21
RSM GPS
Figure 6-22
GPS Reversion
Figure 6-23
GPS Reversion Emergency
Presented when a configured GPS source’s data is invalid or unavailable. GPS# or RSM REVERSION annunciations indicate the current GPS Basemap source 1
Figure 6-24
GPS Integrity Flag
Figure 6-25
Altitude Caution
Presented when the PFD’s Selected CDI Navigation Source is a GPS and that GPS is sending an
Integrity alert. See the GPS AFMS for more information 1
Presented to indicate the aircraft is reaching (steady) or deviating (flashing) from the preset altitude.
May be accompanied by a one-second steady tone from an optional tone generator
1
.
Figure 6-26
Decision Height Caution
091-00005-001 REV F
Presented when a connected radio altimeter indicates it has reached the altitude set by the pilot.
See the Radio Altimeter AFMS for more information 1
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 6-21
CAUTION
Figure 6-27
GPSS Source Lost/Changed
Figure 6-28
Data Link Weather Data Error
Figure 6-29
Minimums Caution
Table 6-2
Caution Annunciations
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
Page 6-22
Presented when the previously enabled and valid GPSS source is lost or has changed. Indicates the
GPSS Wings Level mode 1 .
Data Link Weather product data not received for 30 seconds after an error is detected
1
.
The Minimums Markers are presented on the altitude tape and the Selected Minimums Field is presented on the Attitude Display when the MIN Hot Key is selected. The markers include three components – a green triangle at 500 ft. above minimums, a hollow yellow triangle at 100 ft. to 200 ft. above minimums, and a red and yellow striped triangle at the selected minimums
1
.
The MIN legend in the Selected Minimums Field turns inverse amber to alert the pilot whenever the aircraft is at or below the selected minimums setting. When configured, an optional Sonaltert generates a one-second stuttered tone
1
.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 6-23
Page 6-22
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
ADVISORY
Figure 6-30
REV Button Off
091-00005-001 REV F
Figure 6-31
GPSS On
091-00005-001 REV F
Presented when the REV Button is pressed.
Presented when GPSS is enabled and the GPS source is valid. Either GPSS1 or GPSS2 may be annunciated, depending on selection and the number of configured GPS navigators. This also indicates the autopilot heading source
1
.
NOTE
GPSS will always reflect the GPS Basemap source in the Navigation Display and follow its source.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 6-23
ADVISORY
Figure 6-32
GPS Annunciations
Figure 6-33
Traffic Enabled
Figure 6-34
WX-500 Strike Rate
Figure 6-35
WX-500 Cell Rate
Figure 6-36
WX-500 Self-Test
Page 6-24
Associated with the GPS and the Selected CDI Navigation Source. See the GPS AFMS for more information 1 .
NOTE
These annunciations do not display for RS232-based GPS.
Indicates the traffic sensor is enabled
1
.
WX-500 Strike display mode selected. The rate indicates the approximate number of lightning strikes detected per minute 1 .
WX-500 Cell clustering display mode selected. The rate indicates the approximate number of lightning strikes detected per minute
1
.
Self-test mode annunciation that replaces WX-500 Strike/Cell rate information
1
.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 6-25
Page 6-24
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
ADVISORY
Figure 6-37
Data Invalid or Unavailable
Figure 6-38
Navigation Source Invalid or Unavailable
Figure 6-39
GPSS Disabled
Table 6-3
Advisory Annunciations
1. Not available with the Pilot PFD
091-00005-001 REV F
A horizontal red line through any legend indicates that the data is invalid or unavailable
1
.
A horizontal red line through the Selected CDI Navigation Source indicates that the data from the source is invalid or unavailable 1 .
GPSS Hot Key label with a blue background and gray letters indicate that the GPSS is disabled 1 .
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 6-25
Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 6-26
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page PB
Page PB
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Chapter 7
Appendices
7.1. Operating Limitations
Refer to the latest version of the Airplane Flight Manual Supplement (AFMS), Aspen
Avionics document 900-00008-001 for the limitations that apply to your specific aircraft installation.
The AFMS and this Pilot’s Guide must be carried in the aircraft and be immediately available to the pilot while in flight.
For installations that include the optional EFD1000 MFD and/or the EFD500 MFD, the
EFD1000/500 MFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00006-001, must be carried in the aircraft and be immediately available to the pilot while in flight.
7.2. Software Versions and Serial Number
The system software versions for the Main Application Processor (MAP), the Input-
Output Processor (IOP), and the unit Serial Number (S/N) are recorded in the SYSTEM
STATUS page of the Menu.
The ACU software version and serial number are recorded on a label affixed to the ACU unit.
NOTE
To view the software version, press the MENU Button and rotate the Right Knob to the Systems Status page. The “ MAP VER: ” (Main Application Processor
Version) displays the software version your unit is operating (see
Figure 7-1
).
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 7-1
Page 7-2
Figure 7-1
View Main Application Processor
Software Version
Figure 7-2
View Input/Output Processor
Software Version
.
View the Main Application Processor Software Version
1. Press the MENU Button.
2. Rotate the Right Knob to the SYSTEM STATUS Menu page.
3. The MAP VER Menu Key displays the current Main Application Processor
Software Version (
Figure 7-1
).
4. Press the MENU Button to exit.
View the Input/Output Processor Software Version
1. Press the MENU Button.
2. Rotate the Right Knob to the SYSTEM STATUS Menu page.
3. The IOP VER Menu Key displays the current Input/Output Processor Software
Version (
Figure 7-2
).
4. Press the MENU Button to exit.
View the Primary Flight Display Unit’s Serial Number
1. Press the MENU Button.
2. Rotate the Right Knob to the SYSTEM STATUS Menu page.
3. The S/N Menu Key displays the unit’s serial number (
Figure 7-3
).
4. Press the MENU Button to exit.
Figure 7-3
View Unit Serial Number
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 7-3
Page 7-2
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
7.3. Evolution Databases
The Evolution Flight Display System (EFD1000 PFD with EFD1000/500 MFD includes two separate databases loaded on a microSD card; one from Jeppesen and one from Seattle
Avionics Software.
Separate data subscriptions are required from both Jeppesen and Seattle Avionics
Software to maintain the currency of the data for the EFD1000/500 MFD.
For aircraft configured with a PFD only:
•
A microSD card (loaded with only the Jeppesen database) is provided with the purchase of Evolution Synthetic Vision option. The Seattle Avionics database is not required.
For aircraft configured with multiple EFDs; PFD and MFD(s):
•
The MFD requires both Jeppesen and Seattle Avionics Software databases for moving map, terrain, charts, and synthetic vision functions to operate correctly.
• Whenever the Evolution Synthetic Vision option is installed, the microSD card is compatible with either the PFD or the MFD and may be interchanged.
The Evolution system uses a single database configuration in both the PFD and the
MFD products. A microSD card (loaded with both Jeppesen and Seattle Avionics databases) is provided with each Evolution EFD1000/500 MFD.
7.3.1. Jeppesen Database
The Jeppesen database features the following data types:
• NavData® Airports, runways and runway information, frequencies, navaids, controlled and restricted airspace.
• Obstacle Data Depiction of the location and height of man-made obstacles that extend above the ground.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
NOTE
The PFD only requires a preloaded microSD card to support the Evolution Synthetic Vision (ESV) option when installed. Otherwise, the PFD does not require a microSD card.
NOTE
For aircraft configured with multiple EFDs and the
Evolution Synthetic Vision option is installed, the microSD card data configuration is the same for either the PFD or the MFD and is interchangeable between the displays.
The PFD can only read the Jeppesen database whenever the ESV option is installed.
NOTE
When configured with the ESV option, refer to the
Evolution Synthetic Vision Pilot’s Guide Supplement,
091-00031-001.
Page 7-3
NOTE
Aspen recommends that Aspen customers maintain current data on their Evolution Displays.
Page 7-4
• Cultural Data Contains boundary and reference information for countries, other major political subdivisions, large water bodies, coastlines, time zones, and other physical and political features.
• Terrain Data Depicts the contours and shapes of the surface of the earth.
7.3.1.1. Jeppesen Subscription
Jeppesen provides new Aspen customers a complimentary trial subscriptions for three consecutive months (three 28-day cycles) of Jeppesen NavData® updates at no charge.
A Jeppesen database is pre-loaded onto the microSD card that is shipped with the
Evolution Flight Display unit.
Thereafter, the data must be updated via an active Jeppesen data subscription.
NavData®, obstacle, cultural, and terrain data are combined into a single update which is delivered via
Jeppesen Services Update Manager (JSUM)
every 28 days.
To activate your complimentary Jeppesen data subscription
1. Go to
www.aspenavionics.com/customerport
2. Click the
Register
button on the login screen and fill out the easy-to-follow registration form
The registration form consists of the following headings:
•
Owner & aircraft Information
•
Aspen Product Information
•
Register for Jeppesen data
•
Set Up Your Customer Port Login
Aspen Avionics will automatically forward your Evolution Flight Display product registration information to Jeppesen for activation of the complimentary service.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 7-5
Page 7-4
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
You will receive a confirmation email directly from Jeppesen indicating service activation as well as instructions on how to use the Jeppesen Services Update Manager (JSUM).
Although we make every effort to turn the registrations around very quickly, the entire process may take up to 3-4 days
If you already have a login and password and need to register an additional
Evolution Flight Display unit
1. Login to the Customer Port at
www.aspenavionics.com/customerport
.
2. Click on
Register Your Product
link on the sidebar to register additional Aspen
Products.
7.3.1.2. Monthly Jeppesen Updates
The Jeppesen database updates are located in the
Jeppesen Services Update Manager
(JSUM)
. JSUM must be downloaded onto your computer to obtain updates. A compatible computer with the ability to write to a microSD card is required.
To download the Jeppesen Services Update Manager (JSUM)
1. Go to
www.jeppesen.com
.
2. Under
Manager (JSUM)
button.
, click on the
Jeppesen Services Update
3. From the
Technical support- Jeppesen Services Update Manager (JSUM)
page, under the
User Guide
button, click on the highlighted
Download JSUM v #.#. #
to download JSUM onto your computer.
For additional information, click on the
Troubleshooting
or
FAQs
button, or contact
Jeppesen Customer Service (800-621-5377)
.
Overview on downloading the monthly Jeppesen Update
1. Insert the card in your computer’s card slot.
2. Start the JSUM application and login to your account using the credentials provided to you by Jeppesen.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 7-5
CAUTION
• Do not expose the cards to electrostatic discharge or electrical interference.
• Keep the cards out of direct sunlight.
Page 7-6
3. Click on the service you want to download to the microSD card.
4. Click on the
Start
button in JSUM to initiate the download.
For complete detailed instructions, refer to
jeppesen.com
. Once the download is completed with the latest Jeppesen data, download the latest Seattle Avionics data.
7.3.2. Seattle Avionics Software Database
Seattle Avionics Software Database applies to the MFD only
The Seattle Avionics Software database features the following data types:
• Instrument Approach Procedure (IAP) charts
• Standard Instrument Departure (SID) Procedures
• Standard Terminal Arrival Route (STAR) Procedures
• Airport Diagrams
• Radar Instrument Approach Minimums
• IFR Takeoff Minimums
• Obstacle Departure Procedures (ODP)
• IFR Alternate Minimums
7.3.2.1. Seattle Avionics Subscription
Seattle Avionics Software provides new Aspen customers a complimentary trial subscription for three consecutive months (three 28-day cycles) of Seattle Avionics
ChartData™ updates at no charge. The Seattle Avionics ChartData™ database is pre-loaded on the microSD card that is shipped with your Evolution Flight Display unit. Thereafter, the data must be updated via an active Seattle Avionics Software data subscription.
To activate your complimentary Seattle Avionics Software data subscription
1. Go to
www.seattleavionics.com/aspen
2. Create New Account by typing in the required information then click on the
Create Account
button.
3. Download the
Data Manager
to your computer.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 7-7
Page 7-6
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
For complete detailed instructions, click on
How to download and install new data
or contact
Seattle Avionics Technical Support Staff (425-806-0249)
.
7.3.2.2. Seattle Avionics Software Updates
The Seattle Avionics Updates are located in the
Seattle Avionics ChartData Manager.
The
Data Manager
must be downloaded onto your computer to obtain updates from the
Seattle Avionics ChartData Manager
. A compatible computer with the ability to write to a microSD card is required.
Overview for downloading the Seattle Avionics Updates
1. Insert the card in your computer’s card slot.
2. Start the
Data Manager
application and login to your Seattle Avionics account.
3. From the
Seattle Avionics ChartData Manager
, select Aspen
4. Click on the
Download Now
button to initiate the download.
For complete detailed instructions, refer to
seattleavionics.com/aspen
and click on
How to download and install new data
or contact
Seattle Avionics Technical Support Staff
(425-806-0249)
.
Once the microSD card is updated with the latest Jeppesen data and Seattle Avionics data, the card is ready for use.
7.4. MicroSD Card
This section contains the instructions for inserting the preloaded microSD card into the
Evolution Flight Display unit. Each unit that uses the database must have a microSD card (
Figure 7-4
).
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 7-4
MicroSDHC (Secure Digital High Capacity) Card
Label side facing up
NOTE
Each new MFD unit comes with a microSD card provided by Aspen or Jeppesen. The card is specially formatted and preloaded with the Jeppesen
NavData® and the Seattle Avionics ChartData™.
Only microSD cards received from Aspen Avionics or Jeppesen may be used. Use of any other card can adversely affect system operation or performance and is NOT AUTHORIZED
NOTE
Replacement or additional cards supplied from
Jeppesen are preloaded with terrain data only and must be updated as described in Sections 7.3.1 and 7.3.2
before use.
Page 7-7
Figure 7-5
MicroSD Card Slot Locations
CAUTION
It is possible to jam the card between the bezel and the outer edge of the card slot. If the card does not slide in smoothly, something is wrong. Make sure the card is in the card slot and oriented correctly before fully inserting it into the bezel.
Page 7-8
Lost or misplaced microSD card? Contact
Jeppesen Customer Service (800-621-5377)
or email
to purchase a replacement or additional microSD card(s) pre-loaded with terrain data.
7.4.1.
Loading the microSD Card into the EFD Unit
The microSD card slot on the EFD is a small horizontal slot located on the bottom center part of the bezel (
Figure 7-5
). The slot is spring-loaded with an integral locking mechanism. Pushing the card in once locks the card in place. Pushing it again releases the locking mechanism for removal.
7.4.2. Card Installation Procedure and Operational Check
Installation Procedure
1. Remove the microSD card from the packaging
2. Slide the microSD card into the unit’s card slot (
Figure 7-5
) with the metal contacts facing down.
CAUTION
Ensure the card label side is facing up and the metal contacts are facing down towards the unit. Do not force the card. The card only goes one way.
3. Press the card against the spring tension until it is fully inserted, then slowly release the pressure. The card will lock into place
Operational Check after Installing the microSD card
1. Turn on the EFD unit(s) and check the Confirmation Screen for validity dates of the Jeppesen Database and the Charts Database (
Figures 7-6
and
7-7
).
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 7-9
Page 7-8
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
2. Select the functions that use the databases (moving map, terrain, charts, and synthetic vision).
3. Verify the functions can be accessed.
Database Confirmation Screen
The Database Confirmation Screen is presented at system startup and displays the validity dates of the currently loaded:
• Jeppesen Database and the
• Seattle Avionics Software Charts Database (
Figures 7-6
and
7-7
).
At startup, the pilot must acknowledge this operational limitation and the validity dates on the Database Confirmation Screen by pressing either the Left or Right Knob.
7.4.3. Removal Procedure
microSD Card Removal
1. Have a suitable packaging available to accept and protect the microSD card.
2. Press the card against the spring tension, then slowly release the pressure.
3. When the card is unlocked, grasp the card with the thumb and forefinger and remove the card.
4. Place the microSD card in the packaging.
Figure 7-6
PFD Confirmation Screen
Jeppesen Database
(ESV Option Installed)
NOTE
Whenever a preloaded microSD card (loaded with both databases) is inserted into the PFD, the PFD can only read the Jeppesen database (see
Figure
7-6
).
CAUTION
It is possible to push the card in with a fingernail and then suddenly release it, ejecting the microSD card out of the card slot. If the card is dropped, keep in mind that it can be resting on its side.
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Figure 7-7
MFD Confirmation Screen
Jeppesen Database and
Seattle Avionics Software
Charts Database
Page 7-9
Page 7-10
7.5. Specifications
7.5.1. Primary Flight Display Unit (PFD)
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Width
Height
3.50 in. (Measured at Bezel)
7.00 in. (Measured at Bezel)
Can Depth
Overall Depth
4.15 in. (Rear of Bezel to Rear of Can)
6.35 in. (Knob to Rear Pressure Fitting)
Weight
Display Type
Display Colors
Face
Backlight
Rotary Knobs
Dimming
2.9 lbs. (with Mounting Bracket)
6.0 in. Diagonal TFT Active Matrix LCD (400x760)
32,768
Anti-Reflective Coated Glass
High Intensity White LED
Optical Encoder with Momentary Press
Manual & Automatic (Front Bezel Mounted Sensor)
OPERATIONAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Temp
Storage Temp
-20°C to +70°C
-55°C to +85°C
Max Un-Pressurized Operating Altitude 35,000 ft.
Max Pressurized Operating Altitude
55,000 ft.
Cooling Integral Fan
Max Humidity 95% at 50°C
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 7-11
Page 7-10
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Input Voltage
Max Current
+9 to +32 Volts DC
2.4 Amps @ 28 VDC
4.8 Amps @ 14 VDC
I/O SPECIFICATIONS
ARINC 429 Inputs
ARINC 429 Outputs
RS-232 Inputs
RS-232 Outputs
Pitot / Static
CERTIFICATION SPECIFICATIONS
FAA Technical Standard Order
5
1
5
3
Quick Connect
EASA (European Aviation Safety Agency)
ETSO (European Technical Standard
Order)
TSO-C2d / ETSO-C2D.......................................................................Airspeed Instruments
TSO-C3d / ETSO-C3D................................................................Turn and Slip Instrument
TSO-C4c / ETSO-C4C...........................................................Bank and Pitch Instruments
TSO-C6d / ETSO-C6D..................................................Direction Instrument Magnetic
(Gyroscopically Stabilized)
TSO-C8d / ETSO-C8D.......................Vertical Velocity Instrument (Rate of Climb)
TSO-C10b / ETSO-C10B......................Altitude Pressure Activated Sensitive Type
TSO-C106 / ETSO-C106.........................................................................Air Data Computer
TSO-C113 / ETSO-C113....................Airborne Multipurpose Electronic Displays
Software
Environmental
Categories
Table 7-1
Primary Flight Display Unit (PFD) Specifications
091-00005-001 REV F
RTCA DO-178B Level C
RTCA DO-160E
See Environmental Qualification Sheet found in the Installation Manual.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 7-11
Page 7-12
7.5.2. Remote Sensor Module (RSM)
Width
Length
Height
Weight
Input Voltage
Max Current
Table 7-2
Remote Sensor Module (RSM) Specifications
2.65 in.
4.40 in.
1.00 in.
0.2 lbs.
Provided by PFD
Included in PFD Current
7.5.3. Analog Converter Unit (ACU)
Width
Length
Height
Weight
Input Voltage
Max Current
Interfaces
Table 7-3
Analog Converter Unit (ACU) Specifications
5.75 in. (including mounting flange)
4.30 in. (including connector)
1.60 in. (including mounting flange)
0.8 lbs.
+11 to +32 VDC
0.5 Amps @ 28 VDC
1.0 Amps @ 14 VDC
ARINC-429 and RS-232
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 7-13
Page 7-12
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
7.5.4. Operational Specifications
Airspeed Range
Altitude Range
Vertical Speed
Range
Turn Rate
Barometric
Pressure
Correction Range
Internal Battery
Table 7-4
Operational Specifications
Minimum displayed airspeed
Maximum displayed airspeed
Minimum displayed altitude
Maximum displayed altitude
Maximum displayed vertical speed rates (tape)
Maximum displayed vertical speed rates (numerical value)
Maximum displayed turn rate
28.10 to 30.99 In Hg (946 to 1049 mB)
Minimum operating time while on internal battery
20 KIAS
999 KIAS
-1,600 ft. MSL
51,000 ft. MSL
+/-2,000 fpm
+/- 9,990 fpm
6.0 °/second
30 minutes
1
091-00005-001 REV F 091-00005-001 REV F
1. At extreme cold temperatures the internal current limiting protections of the internal battery may cause the battery to shut off and not power the display.
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 7-13
7.6. Glossary
ºC
ºF
Accuracy
A/D
AC
ACU
ADC
ADI
AFMS
AGL
AHRS
AI
Degrees Celsius
Degrees Fahrenheit
Estimated position accuracy in feet or meters
Analog to Digital
Alternating Current
Analog Converter Unit
Air Data Computer
Attitude Director Indicator
Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
Above Ground Level
Attitude Heading Reference System
Attitude Indicator
AIM
AIRMET
Aeronautical Information Manual
Airman’s Meteorological Information
Altitude Elevation above mean sea level
APPR Approach
APT Airport
ARC Partial Compass Rose, arc format (100°)
ARINC
ATC
ATIS
Aeronautical Radio, Inc.
Air Traffic Control
Automatic Terminal Information Service
Page 7-14
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
AWOS
Back Course
CDI
CFR
CM
Comm
Course
Automated Weather Observation System
Localizer back course approach where the signal on the back side of the localizer is used for alignment to the runway opposite of normal localizer alignment.
Battery Time The time remaining on the battery before it is fully discharged.
Back Course BC
Bearing The compass direction from the current position to the destination.
Bearing Pointer BP
Calibrated Airspeed Indicated airspeed corrected for installation and instrument errors.
Course Deviation Indicator
Code of Federal Regulations
Configuration Module
Communication radio
Course to Steer
Cross Track
The route taken from the starting position to destination.
The recommended direction to steer in order to reduce cross-track error and return to the course line.
The perpendicular distance, left or right, away from the selected course.
091-00005-001 REV F
Crosstrack Error The distance the aircraft is off the desired course.
CRS Course
CTS dBZ
Course to Steer decibels ‘Z’ (radar return)
DC
Decision Height
Declutter
Direct Current
A specified height or altitude in the precision approach at which a missed approach must be initiated if the required visual reference to continue the approach has not been acquired.
This allows the pilot sufficient time to safely reconfigure the aircraft to climb and execute the missed approach procedures while avoiding terrain and obstacles.
Reduce the number of basemap symbols displayed on screen.
Deg Degree
Desired Track The desired course between the active “FROM” and “TO” waypoints.
DH
Distance (Next)
Decision Height
The great circle distance from current location to a Go To destination or the final waypoint in a route.
DME
DTK
EASA
Distance Measuring Equipment
Desired Track
European Aviation Safety Agency
EFD
EFIS
Elevation
ETA (Destination)
Evolution Flight Display
Electronic Flight Instrument System
The height above mean sea level.
Estimated Time of Arrival. The estimated time you will reach a Go To destination or the final waypoint in a route.
ETA (Next)
ETE (Destination)
ETE (Next)
ETSO
FAA
FAF
FD
Estimated Time of Arrival. The estimated time you will reach a Go To destination or the next waypoint in a route.
Estimated Time Enroute. The estimated time required to reach a Go To destination or the final waypoint in a route.
Estimated Time Enroute. The estimated time required to reach a Go To destination or the next waypoint in a route.
European Technical Standard Order
Federal Aviation Administration
Final Approach Fix
Flight Director fpm Feet Per Minute ft Feet
GPS
GPSS
Ground Track
Global Positioning System
GPS Steering see Track
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 7-15
Ground Speed
GS
Heading
The velocity that the aircraft is travelling relative to a ground position.
Glide Slope or Ground Speed
The direction an aircraft is pointed, based upon indications from a magnetic compass or a properly set directional gyro.
Hg Mercury
HSI
Hz
Horizontal Situation Indicator
Hertz (frequency)
IAF
IAS
IFR
ILS
Initial Approach Fix
Indicated Air Speed
Instrument Fight Rules
Instrument Landing System
IMC in Hg
Indicated
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
Inches of Mercury
IOP
JSUM
Information provided by properly calibrated and set instruments on the aircraft panel.
Input/Output Processor
Jeppesen Services Update Manager kHz Kilohertz
KIAS Knots Indicated Air Speed km Kilometer kt Knots
LAT Latitude
Page 7-16
LCD
LDI
Liquid Crystal Display
Lateral Deviation Indicator
Leg The portion of a flight plan between two waypoints
LOC Localizer
MAP mB Millibars
MFD
MHz Megahertz
MSG Message
MSL
NAVAID
NDB
NXRD nm
Main Application Processor
Multi-Function Display
Mean Sea Level
Navigation Aid
Non-Directional Beacon
Next Generation Weather Radar
Nautical Miles
NRST Nearest
OAT
OBS
PFD
RMI
RSM
SDHC
TA
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Outside Air Temperature
Omni-Bearing Selector
Primary Flight Display
Radio Magnetic Indicator
Remote Sensor Module
Secure Digital High Capacity (microSDHC card)
Traffic Advisory
091-00005-001 REV F
TACAN
TAS
TCAS
TERM
TIS
Track
TSO
VAC
VDC
VDI
VFR
Tactical Air Navigation System
True Air Speed
Traffic Collision Avoidance System
Terminal Mode
Traffic Information System
Direction of aircraft movement relative to a ground position; also Ground Track’
Technical Standard Order
Volts, Alternating Current
Volts, Direct Current
Vertical Deviation Indicator
Visual Flight Rules
VHF Very High Frequency
VLOC VOR/Localizer
VOR
VORTAC
VHF Omni-Directional Radio Range
VHF Omni-Directional Radio Range and Tactical
Air Navigation
VSI
WAAS
Vertical Speed Indicator
Wide Area Augmentation System
WPT Waypoint
WX Weather
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 7-17
7.7. Index
Symbols
1/2, Hot Key .............................................................................................................................2-12
2/2, Hot Key .............................................................................................................................2-13
360/ARC, Hot Key .................................................................................................................2-12
A
ADAHRS ...........................................................................................................................4-2 – 4-7
Attitude .....................................................................................................................................4-3
Free Gyro Mode ......................................................................................................4-6 – 4-7
Heading .......................................................................................................................4-5 – 4-6
Pitot Obstruction Monitor .............................................................................................4-4
Advisory ......................................................................................................................6-23 – 6-25
Data Invalid or Unavailable ........................................................................................6-25
GPS Annunciations .............................................................................................6-16, 6-21
GPSS On .................................................................................................................................6-23
Navigation Source Invalid or Unavailable ........................................................6-25
REV Button Off ...................................................................................................................6-23
Traffic Enabled ...................................................................................................................6-24
WX-500 Cell Rate ..............................................................................................................6-24
WX-500 Self-Test ...............................................................................................................6-24
WX-500 Strike Rate .........................................................................................................6-24
AHRS Reset, In-Flight ..........................................................................................................6-14
Perform ..................................................................................................................................6-15
Aircraft Ownship Symbol ................................................................................................4-27
Air Data, Attitude and Heading Reference System ...............................4-2 – 4-7
See also
ADAHRS
Airspeed Indicator (Airspeed) ........................................................................4-10 – 4-13
Airspeed ................................................................................................................................4-10
Bug .......................................................................................................................................4-10
Bug, Set ..................................................................................................................3-16
,
4-12
Range ..................................................................................................................................4-11
Airspeed Display ..............................................................................................................4-13
Tape ..........................................................................................................................................4-10
Hide/Display ...................................................................................................................4-13
Tape and Bug .....................................................................................................................2-25
Speed Markers ..............................................................................................................2-25
Altimeter .....................................................................................................................4-15 – 4-23
Decision Height ................................................................................................................4-22
MINIMUMS ...........................................................................................................................4-19
Altitude ........................................................................................................................4-15 – 4-23
Alerter .....................................................................................................................................4-15
Alerter, Set ............................................................................................................................3-15
Bug ...........................................................................................................................4-17 – 4-18
Bug, Set ..................................................................................................................................4-17
Caution ...................................................................................................................................6-20
Display ....................................................................................................................................4-22
Level-Off and Deviation Alert ..................................................................................4-18
Tape ..........................................................................................................................................4-15
Hide/Display ...................................................................................................................4-23
Tape and Alerter ...............................................................................................................2-26
Trend Vector ........................................................................................................................4-15
Page 7-18
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Altitude Display
Attitude Indicator ......................................................................................2-24
,
4-8 – 4-9
Analog Converter Unit .........................................................................................................1-7
Approvals ....................................................................................................................................... xii
APV (Approaches with Vertical Guidance) ...........................................................4-61
ARC/360, Hot Key .................................................................................................................2-12
Attitude Display ...........................................................................................2-22 – 2-28
,
4-8
Airspeed Indicator ............................................................................................4-10 – 4-13
Altimeter ................................................................................................................4-15 – 4-23
Attitude Indicator ...............................................................................................................4-8
Components ......................................................................................................................2-23
Attitude Fail ..............................................................................................................................6-18
Attitude Indicators, Difference ........................................................................................6-7
Auto Course .............................................................................................................................4-38
Disable ....................................................................................................................................4-39
Enable .....................................................................................................................................4-38
Select .......................................................................................................................................2-35
Autopilot Integration .........................................................................................................4-53
Autopilot Operations, Typical .......................................................................................4-58
APPR Mode Operation - GPS or GPS/RNAV APV WAAS Approach ....4-62
APPR Mode Operation - ILS Approach with Vectors to Final ...............4-61
GPS APPR Mode Operation - WAAS GPS Underlay to ILS Approach
Using Pilot Nav and GPSS ..............................................................................4-63
GPS APPR Mode Operation - WAAS GPS Underlay to ILS Approach
With ATC Vectors to Final ...............................................................................4-64
HDG Mode Operation - GPS Steering (GPSS ..................................................4-59
HDG Mode Operation - Heading Bug Steering ............................................4-59
NAV Mode Operation - GPS Navigation ............................................................4-60
NAV Mode Operation - VLOC Navigation .........................................................4-59
Auto Range
Activate ..................................................................................................................................4-47
Deactivate ............................................................................................................................4-47
Enable .....................................................................................................................................4-47
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
B
Barometer ........................................................................................................................2-6
,
4-23
Barometric Pressure Adjustment ...........................................................................4-17
Barometric Pressure, Set .....................................................................................3-8
,
4-17
Barometric Pressure Setting Display ....................................................................4-26
Barometric Units of Measure, Set ..........................................................................4-16
Battery
Countdown .........................................................................................................................6-18
Operational ..........................................................................................................................6-18
Status, View ..........................................................................................................................6-13
Bearing Pointers ....................................................................................................................2-36
Double-Line Bearing Pointer Source, Select ...................................................4-42
Nav Sources, Select ........................................................................................................3-10
Single-Line Bearing Pointer Source, Select ......................................................4-42
Source Select Buttons ......................................................................................................2-8
Source Selection ..............................................................................................................4-40
Brightness Control ...............................................................................................................5-20
See also
Lighting
BRT ADJUST .............................................................................................................................2-18
BRT AUTO ..................................................................................................................................2-18
Buttons ............................................................................................................................................ xx
C
Cautions ......................................................................................................................6-20 – 6-22
Altitude Caution ...............................................................................................................6-21
Check Pitot Heat ...............................................................................................................6-20
Cross Check Attitude .....................................................................................................6-20
Data link Weather Data Error ....................................................................................6-22
Decision Height Caution .............................................................................................6-21
Explained .................................................................................................................................xxii
GPS Integrity Flag ............................................................................................................6-21
Page 7-19
GPS Invalid ...........................................................................................................................6-21
GPS Reversion ....................................................................................................................6-21
GPS Reversion Emergency .........................................................................................6-21
GPSS Source Lost/Changed ......................................................................................6-22
Minimums Caution .........................................................................................................6-22
RSM GPS ................................................................................................................................6-21
CDI
Course, Select .....................................................................................................................4-39
Navigation Source ...........................................................................................................4-34
Radio Mode, GPS .........................................................................................................4-36
Radio Source, VHF .......................................................................................................4-36
Select ......................................................................................................................3-10
,
4-35
Nav Source Select Button ..............................................................................................2-9
Selected Course ................................................................................................................4-39
Source Information Block ...........................................................................................4-35
Source Label .......................................................................................................................4-35
Source Select Button .....................................................................................................4-35
Check Pitot Heat ...................................................................................................................6-20
CHECK PITOT HEAT .................................................................................................................4-4
Cleaning the Display Screen .........................................................................................2-21
Color Philosophy ......................................................................................................................xxi
Compass ....................................................................................................................................4-28
360° Compass Mode .....................................................................................................4-28
ARC CDI/HSI Compass Mode, Select ...................................................................4-29
ARC Compass Mode ......................................................................................................4-28
Compass Scale ..................................................................................................................4-27
Compass Type, Select ...................................................................................................4-30
Modes: 360º vs. ARC .......................................................................................................2-32
Select .......................................................................................................................................3-20
Configuration Module .........................................................................................................1-6
Configuring V-speeds .........................................................................................5-15 – 5-19
Controls
Knobs ............................................................................................................................2-4 – 2-8
Left Knob Functions .....................................................................................................2-5
Right Knob Functions ..................................................................................................2-5
SYNC Function ....................................................................................................2-6 – 2-7
Controls and Display ............................................................................................. 2-1 – 2-38
Controls .................................................................................................................... 2-4 – 2-19
Elements .....................................................................................................................2-2 – 2-3
Conventions ................................................................................................................................xix
Color Philosophy ..................................................................................................................xxi
Covered Functionality ......................................................................................................xix
Example Graphics ..............................................................................................................xxiii
Information Covered in this Pilot’s Guide .......................................................... xxvi
Pilot Familiarity ....................................................................................................................xxiii
Terminology ............................................................................................................................xix
Warnings, Cautions, Notes ............................................................................................xxii
Copyrights, Trademarks and Patents ...............................................................................xi
Course Deviation Indicator and Scale .....................................................................4-33
Course Pointer ........................................................................................................................4-31
Course Pointer and Deviation Indicator ................................................................2-33
Covered Functionality ...........................................................................................................xix
CROSS CHECK ATTITUDE .............................................................................. 4-3
,
6-7
,
6-20
CRS ................................................................................................................................2-5 – 2-8
Customizing the PFD ............................................................................................ 5-1 – 5-20
Customizing the Map ........................................................................................................5-12
D
Data Bar ..........................................................................................................................2-29
,
4-24
Databases ............................................................................................................................. 1-8, 7-3
Data Invalid or Unavailable ............................................................................................6-25
Data Link Weather ...............................................................................................................4-67
Age Annunciations .........................................................................................................4-69
Page 7-20
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Age, View ..............................................................................................................................4-69
Data Error ..............................................................................................................................6-22
Legend, Display ................................................................................................................4-68
NEXRAD Methodology .................................................................................................4-68
Overlay, Display .....................................................................................................3-13
,
4-66
Product Age Limits and Update Frequency ...................................................4-69
Decision Height ....................................................................................................................4-22
Alert ..........................................................................................................................................4-15
Caution ...................................................................................................................................6-21
Declutter
Settings ..................................................................................................................................5-14
Deviation
Indicator ................................................................................................................................4-27
Off Scale Indication ........................................................................................................2-34
Scale .........................................................................................................................................4-27
Direction Indicator Fail ......................................................................................................6-18
Direction Indicator (Magnetic Compass) .................................. 2-31 – 2-32
,
4-27
Display ...............................................................................................................1-5
,
2-20 – 2-37
Attitude Display ................................................................................................................2-22
Cleaning the Display Screen .....................................................................................2-21
Lighting .................................................................................................................................2-18
Document Revisions ................................................................................................................ iv
Dual Display ................................................................................................................................1-2
E
Electrical Power, Loss of Aircraft .....................................................................................6-9
Emergency and Abnormal Procedures ..................................................... 6-1 – 6-26
Pitot/Static System Blockage ..........................................................................6-2 – 6-6
Evolution Flight Display (EFD) system ........................................................................1-1
Dual Display ...........................................................................................................................1-2
Single Display ........................................................................................................................1-2
System Overview ................................................................................................................1-4
Trio Display ....................................................................................................................1-3
,
1-4
Evolution Weather Receiver .............................................................................................1-7
Example Flight .......................................................................................................... 3-5 – 3-27
Arrival and Approach to Landing ...........................................................3-22 – 3-27
Departure ..............................................................................................................3-17 – 3-18
En Route .................................................................................................................3-19 – 3-21
Pre-Departure ....................................................................................................... 3-6 – 3-16
Example Graphics ..................................................................................................................xxiii
External Voltage Status, View ........................................................................................6-12
Extreme Pitch ..........................................................................................................................6-19
F
Flight Director ...............................................................................................................4-9
,
4-58
Flight Plan .................................................................................................................................4-48
Free Gyro Mode ........................................................................................................................4-6
G
GENERAL SETTINGS A ...........................................................................................................5-1
GENERAL SETTINGS B ...........................................................................................................5-2
GPS
Annunciations ...................................................................................................................6-23
Failures ....................................................................................................................................6-11
Integrity Flag .......................................................................................................................6-21
Invalid ......................................................................................................................................6-21
Reversion ..............................................................................................................................6-21
Reversion Emergency ...................................................................................................6-21
GPSS 4-53–4-57
Disable ....................................................................................................................................6-17
Enable/Disable ..................................................................................................................4-55
Engage ...................................................................................................................................3-19
Hot Key ...................................................................................................................................2-12
Operation, Annunciations, and Autopilot Modes .......................................6-16
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 7-21
Source Lost/Changed ...................................................................................................6-22
Wings Level .........................................................................................................................6-17
Ground Speed ........................................................................................................................4-24
Ground Track Marker ..........................................................................................................2-33
H
Hazard Awareness ...............................................................................................................4-65
Data Link Weather ...........................................................................................................4-67
Lightning ..............................................................................................................................4-65
Traffic .......................................................................................................................................4-71
Heading .....................................................................................................................................4-27
Display ....................................................................................................................................4-44
Heading and Heading Bug ........................................................................................4-43
Heading Bug, Set .......................................................................................... 2-8
,
3-9
,
4-43
Horizontal Situation Indicator ......................................................................................2-34
Hot Keys ..............................................................................................................................xx
,
2-11
I
IAS ................................................................................................................................2-5 – 2-8
ILS Approaches ......................................................................................................................4-63
Examples ..................................................................................................................3-22–3-27
Information Covered in this Pilot’s Guide ...............................................................xxiv
Initial Flap Extension Speed Marker .........................................................................4-10
Instrument Approach Indicators ................................................................................2-28
Internal Battery Status, View ..........................................................................................6-13
Introduction ..................................................................................................................1-1 – 1-3
K
Knobs xxxii
,
2-4–2-8
Left Knob Functions ..........................................................................................................2-5
Right Knob Functions ......................................................................................................2-5
SYNC Function .........................................................................................................2-6 – 2-7
SYNC Function, Perform .................................................................................................2-6
Using the Knobs (Example) ..........................................................................................2-8
L
Lateral Deviation Indicator .............................................................................................4-50
Lighting ..........................................................................................................................2-18
,
5-20
Lightning ...................................................................................................................................4-65
Data Link Lightning Symbol .....................................................................................4-66
Overlay, Display .........................................................................................3-13
,
3-21
,
4-65
WX-500 Cell Symbol ......................................................................................................4-66
WX-500 Strike Symbol ..................................................................................................4-66
Loss of Aircraft Electrical Power .....................................................................................6-9
LPV Approaches ....................................................................................................................4-63
LTNG, Hot Key .........................................................................................................................2-13
M
MENU ...........................................................................................................................2-14 – 2-17
Brightness Control ..........................................................................................................2-15
Menu Text .............................................................................................................................2-16
Overview .................................................................................................................. 5-1 – 5-11
360° MAP SETTINGS ......................................................................................................5-4
ARC MAP SETTINGS ......................................................................................................5-5
GENERAL SETTINGS A ..................................................................................................5-1
GENERAL SETTINGS B ..................................................................................................5-2
POWER SETTINGS ........................................................................................................5-10
SYSTEM STATUS ............................................................................................................5-11
VSPEEDS A ..........................................................................................................................5-6
VSPEEDS B ...........................................................................................................................5-6
XM RECEIVER A ................................................................................................................5-7
XM RECEIVER B .................................................................................................................5-8
XM RECEIVER C ................................................................................................................5-9
Page 7-22
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Page graphical bar ..........................................................................................................2-15
Page Name ..........................................................................................................................2-15
Page number and mode .............................................................................................2-15
Using the Menus ...............................................................................................2-14 – 2-17
Access and Navigate .................................................................................................2-16
Edit Menu Items ...........................................................................................................2-17
Map
Auto Range ..........................................................................................................................4-47
Data Source and Reversion .......................................................................................4-48
Declutter Settings ............................................................................................................5-13
Declutter and Range .....................................................................................................4-46
Declutter Level, Select ......................................................................................3-11
,
4-46
Feature Group & Layer Order ....................................................................................5-14
Flight Plan .............................................................................................................................4-48
Max Range ...........................................................................................................................5-14
Overlays .................................................................................................................................4-45
Range, Change ......................................................................................................3-12
,
4-46
Symbol Display, Set ........................................................................................................5-13
MAP, Hot Key ...........................................................................................................................2-12
MEMS .............................................................................................................................................4-2
Menu Keys ..................................................................................................................................... xx
Micro Electro-Mechanical Systems ..............................................................................4-2
MicroSD Card ..................................................................................................................... 1-8, 7-7
MINIMUMS ...............................................................................................................................4-19
Adjustment ..........................................................................................................................4-21
Alert ..........................................................................................................................................4-15
Caution ...................................................................................................................................6-22
Display/Hide .......................................................................................................................4-20
MIN, Hot Key .................................................................................................2-5 – 2-8
,
2-12
Set ..........................................................................................................................................4-21
N
Navigation
Information ..........................................................................................................................2-33
Source .....................................................................................................................................4-27
Source Info Block .............................................................................................................4-27
Source Invalid or Unavailable ...................................................................................6-25
Source Select Buttons ...................................................................................... 2-9 – 2-10
Navigation Display ..................................................................................................2-30
,
4-27
Aircraft Heading Display ..............................................................................................4-44
Auto Course ........................................................................................................................4-38
Auto Course Select .........................................................................................................2-35
Bearing Pointers ...............................................................................................................2-36
Bearing Pointer Source Selection ..........................................................................4-40
CDI Navigation Source .................................................................................................4-34
CDI Selected Course ......................................................................................................4-39
Compass ................................................................................................................................4-28
Components ......................................................................................................................2-31
Course Deviation Indicator and Scale ................................................................4-33
Course Pointer ...................................................................................................................4-31
Course Pointer and Deviation Indicator ............................................................2-34
Deviation Off Scale Indication .................................................................................2-35
Direction Indicator (Magnetic Compass) ..........................................................2-32
Ground Track Marker .....................................................................................................4-49
Heading and Heading Bug ........................................................................................4-43
Horizontal Situation Indicator ..................................................................................2-34
Map Overlays ......................................................................................................................4-45
Rate of Turn Indicator ........................................................................................2-37
,
4-44
Situational Awareness Map .......................................................................................2-38
TO/FROM Indicator .........................................................................................................4-32
Vertical Speed Indicator ..............................................................................................2-37
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 7-23
Navigation Source
Select Buttons
Bearing Pointer Source Select Buttons ..........................................................2-10
CDI Nav Source Select Button ................................................................................2-9
NEXRAD Methodology .....................................................................................................4-68
Notes
See also
Advisory
Explained .................................................................................................................................xxii
NRM, Hot Key ..........................................................................................................................2-13
Numerical Airspeed Value ..............................................................................................4-11
Numerical Altitude Value ................................................................................................4-15
NXRD, Hot Key ........................................................................................................................2-13
O
Operating Limitations ..........................................................................................................7-1
Outside Air Temperature .................................................................................................4-24
OAT Units of Measure, Set ..........................................................................................4-25
P
Pilot Familiarity .........................................................................................................................xxiii
Pilot PFD ....................................................................................................................xxiv, 1-3, 2-1
Pitch Scale ....................................................................................................................................4-9
Pitot and/or Static System Failures, Identifying ....................................................6-4
Pitot Obstruction Monitor .................................................................................................4-4
Pitot/Static System Blockage ...........................................................................................6-2
Suspected ...............................................................................................................................6-3
Power On Manually ...............................................................................................................6-8
Power Override ......................................................................................................................6-13
R
Range Button ..........................................................................................................................2-19
Rate of Turn Indicator ................................................................................2-37
,
4-27
,
4-44
Rear Connections ....................................................................................................................1-5
Remote Sensor Module ......................................................................................................1-6
REV Button ................................................................................................................................2-19
Off ..........................................................................................................................................6-23
Right Knob Functions ...........................................................................................................2-5
RNAV Instrument Approaches .....................................................................................4-62
Roll Scale ......................................................................................................................................4-9
RSM Emergency GPS Use ................................................................................................6-11
RSM GPS .....................................................................................................................................6-20
S
Service Agreement, XM WX Satellite Radio ............................................................xvii
Shutdown Procedure ...........................................................................................................6-8
Single Display ............................................................................................................................1-2
Situational Awareness Map ...........................................................................................2-38
Slip/Skip Indicator ...................................................................................................................4-9
Software Versions .......................................................................................................7-1 – 7-2
Input/Output Processor Software Version, View .............................................7-2
Main Application Processor Software Version, View .....................................7-1
Specifications ..........................................................................................................7-10 – 7-13
Analog Converter Unit .................................................................................................7-12
EFD1000 Display Unit ....................................................................................................7-10
Operational ..........................................................................................................................7-10
Remote Sensor Module ...............................................................................................7-12
Speed Bands ...........................................................................................................................4-10
Ranges ....................................................................................................................................5-17
Speed Markers ...........................................................................................................2-25
,
4-10
Startup Splash Screen ..........................................................................................................3-6
Page 7-24
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
SYNC Function ................................................................................................................2-6–2-7
System Architecture ..............................................................................................................1-4
System Overview ....................................................................................................................1-4
T
Terminology ................................................................................................................................xix
Buttons ........................................................................................................................................ xx
Hot Keys ..................................................................................................................................... xx
Knobs ........................................................................................................................................... xx
Menu Keys ................................................................................................................................ xx
TO/FROM Indicators ...............................................................................................4-27
,
4-32
Track Marker ................................................................................................................4-27
,
4-49
Traffic ..........................................................................................................................................4-70
Altitude Filter ......................................................................................................................4-74
Change ..............................................................................................................................4-74
Enabled ..................................................................................................................................6-24
Overlay, Display .....................................................................................................3-14
,
4-71
Symbols .................................................................................................................................4-72
Unavailable ..........................................................................................................................4-75
TRFC, Hot Key .........................................................................................................................2-13
Trio Display ..................................................................................................................................1-3
True Airspeed ..........................................................................................................................4-24
U
Unit Serial Number, View ....................................................................................................7-2
UNR, Hot Key ...........................................................................................................................2-13
Using the Menus ..................................................................................................................2-14
V
Vertical Deviation Indicator ...........................................................................................4-51
Vertical Speed Indicator .......................................................................................2-37
,
4-52
Voltage Status, View ...........................................................................................................6-12
Vspeeds ......................................................................................................................................4-10
Configuring ..........................................................................................................5-15 – 5-19
Definitions .............................................................................................................5-15 – 5-16
Initial Flap Extension ......................................................................................................5-16
Textual Labels, Enable ...................................................................................................5-18
Textual Vspeed Labels, Set .........................................................................................5-19
W
WAAS Approaches ..............................................................................................................4-62
Warning, Caution, and Advisory Summary ...........................................6-18 – 6-25
Warnings .....................................................................................................................6-18 – 6-19
Attitude Fail .........................................................................................................................6-18
Battery Countdown ........................................................................................................6-18
Battery Operational ........................................................................................................6-18
Direction Indicator Fail .................................................................................................6-18
Explained .................................................................................................................................xxii
Extreme Pitch .....................................................................................................................6-19
Warranty ........................................................................................................................................xiii
Card ............................................................................................................................................xiv
Conditions ................................................................................................................................xiii
Dealer ...........................................................................................................................................xv
Exclusions .................................................................................................................................xiii
Exclusive ....................................................................................................................................xiv
Extension of .............................................................................................................................xv
Incidental Damages ...........................................................................................................xiv
091-00005-001 REV F EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide
Page 7-25
Invalidation ..............................................................................................................................xiv
Limitation of Liability .........................................................................................................xiv
Procedure ..................................................................................................................................xv
Remedy ......................................................................................................................................xiii
Transportation Costs ..........................................................................................................xv
Weather Data .........................................................................................................................xvi
Weather
Age Annunciations .........................................................................................................4-69
Data Warranty ........................................................................................................................xvi
Product Age Limits and Update Frequency ...................................................4-69
Wind
Direction ...............................................................................................................................4-24
Direction Arrow ................................................................................................................4-24
Speed ......................................................................................................................................4-24
Speed, Direction, and Arrow .....................................................................................4-26
Wings Level ..............................................................................................................................4-58
WX-500
Cell Rate .................................................................................................................................6-24
Self-Test ..................................................................................................................................6-24
Strike Rate .............................................................................................................................6-24
X
XM WX Satellite Radio Service Agreement .............................................................xvii
Page 7-26
EFD1000 PFD Pilot’s Guide 091-00005-001 REV F
Aspen Avionics, Inc.
5001 Indian School Road NE
Albuquerque, NM 87110
Phone: 888-99ASPEN (888-992-7736)
Phone, International: (505) 856-5034
Fax: (505) 314-5440 [email protected]
www.aspenavionics.com
091-00005-001 REV F Printed in USA
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 36 Welcome and Introduction
- 36 System Overview
- 36 Primary Flight Display Unit (PFD)
- 36 Configuration Module (CM)
- 36 Remote Sensor Module (RSM)
- 36 Evolution Databases
- 37 Controls and Display
- 37 Controls & Display Orientation
- 37 Controls
- 37 Left and Right Knobs
- 37 Left Knob Functions
- 37 Right Knob Functions
- 37 SYNC Function
- 37 Using the Knobs (Example)
- 37 Hot Keys
- 37 Using the Menus
- 37 Display Lighting
- 37 Range Buttons
- 37 REV Button
- 37 Display
- 37 Cleaning the Display Screen
- 37 Attitude Display
- 37 Attitude Director Indicator (ADI)
- 37 Airspeed Tape and Bug
- 37 Mach Number Display for Mmo Aircraft
- 37 and Vertical Speed
- 105 Data Bar
- 105 Navigation Display
- 105 (Magnetic Compass)
- 105 Rate of Turn Indicator
- 105 Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
- 105 Situational Awareness Map
- 106 Flying the Pro PFD
- 106 Quick Controls Overview
- 106 Example Flight Scenario
- 106 Pre-Departure (Startup)
- 106 Departure
- 106 Enroute
- 106 Arrival and Approach to Landing
- 106 Conclusion
- 107 Reference Guide
- 107 Attitude
- 107 Pitot Obstruction Monitor
- 107 Heading
- 107 Free Gyro Mode
- 107 Degraded ADAHRS Performance
- 107 Attitude Display
- 107 Attitude Indicator
- 107 Roll Scale
- 107 Pitch Scale
- 107 Slip/Skid Indicator
- 107 Airspeed Indicator
- 107 Selected Airspeed
- 107 Airspeed Display
- 107 MACH Number Display for Mmo Aircraft
- 107 Altimeter
- 107 Barometric Units of Measure
- 107 Selected Altitude Field
- 107 Altitude Level-Off and Deviation Alert
- 107 Altitude Display
- 107 Data Bar
- 126 True Airspeed or Mach Number (when enabled)
- 126 Ground Speed
- 126 Outside Air Temperature (when enabled)
- 126 Barometric Pressure Setting Display
- 126 Navigation Display
- 126 Compass
- 126 360° Compass Mode
- 126 ARC Compass Mode
- 126 Heading Bug
- 126 Aircraft Heading Display
- 126 Rate of Turn Indicator
- 126 Basemap Overlays
- 126 Basemap Declutter and Range
- 126 Vertical Speed Indicator
- 127 Customizing the PFD
- 127 Menu Overview
- 127 Customizing Basemap Symbol Declutter Settings
- 127 Configuring Vspeeds
- 127 LCD Brightness Control
- 225 Expanded Emergency and Abnormal Procedures
- 225 Pitot/Static System Blockage
- 225 and/or Static System Failures
- 225 and Mechanical Attitude Indicators
- 225 Abnormal Shutdown Procedure
- 225 Loss of Aircraft Electrical Power
- 225 Overvoltage Protection
- 225 Power Override
- 225 In-Flight AHRS Reset
- 225 Warning, Caution, and Advisory Summary
- 226 Appendices
- 226 Operating Limitations
- 226 Software Versions and Serial Number
- 226 Evolution Database
- 226 Jeppesen Subscription
- 226 Monthly Jeppesen Updates
- 226 Seattle Avionics Software Database
- 226 Seattle Avionics Subscription
- 226 Seattle Avionics Software Updates
- 226 MicroSD Card
- 226 Loading the microSD Card into the EFD Unit
- 226 Card Installation Procedure and Operational Check
- 226 Removal Procedure
- 226 Specifications
- 226 Primary Flight Display Unit (PFD)
- 226 Remote Sensor Module (RSM)
- 226 Analog Converter Unit (ACU)
- 226 Operational Specifications
- 226 Glossary
- 226 Index